Honeywell Process Solutions. SoftMaster. User's Guide. ML200-SoftMaster R200 January Release 200. Honeywell

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Honeywell Process Solutions. SoftMaster. User's Guide. ML200-SoftMaster R200 January Release 200. Honeywell"

Transcription

1 Honeywell Process Solutions SoftMaster User's Guide ML200-SoftMaster R200 January 2011 Release 200 Honeywell

2 Notices and Trademarks Copyright 2011 by Honeywell International Sárl. Release 200 January 2011 While this information is current in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written agreement with and for its customers. In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages. The information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice. Honeywell, PlantScape, Experion PKS, and TotalPlant are registered trademarks of Honeywell International Inc. Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners. Honeywell Process Solutions 1860 W. Rose Garden Lane Phoenix, AZ USA ii SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

3 About This Document This document describes the operations involved in using SoftMaster to program and debug the MasterLogic 200 PLC series. Release Information Document Name Document ID Release Number Publication Date SoftMaster User's Guide - ML200 ML200- SoftMaster 200 January 2011 References The following list identifies all documents that may be source of reference for material discussed in this publication. 2MLI CPUU User s Guide Document Title R200 SoftMaster User's Guide iii January 2011 Honeywell

4 Support and Other Contacts Support and Other Contacts United States and Canada Contact: Phone: Fascimile: Mail: Europe, Middle East, and Africa (EMEA) Contact: Phone: Fascimile: Mail: Honeywell Solution Support Center Calls are answered by dispatcher between 6:00 am and 4:00 pm Mountain Standard Time. Emergency calls outside normal working hours are received by an answering service and returned within one hour Honeywell TAC, MS L W. Garden Lane Phoenix, AZ, USA Honeywell TAC-EMEA TAC-BE02 Hermes Plaza Hermeslaan, 1H B-1831 Diegem, Belgium Pacific India Contact: Phone: Fascimile: Mail: Contact: Phone: Fascimile: Mail: Honeywell Global TAC Pacific (toll free within Australia) (outside Australia) Honeywell Limited Australia 5 Kitchener Way Burswood 6100, Western Australia GTAC@honeywell.com Honeywell Global TAC India Honeywell Automation India Ltd 56 and 57, Hadapsar Industrial Estate Hadapsar, Pune , India Global-TAC-India@honeywell.com iv SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

5 Support and Other Contacts Korea Contact: Phone: Fascimile: Mail: Honeywell Global TAC Korea Honeywell Co., Ltd 4F, Sangam IT Tower 1590, DMC Sangam-dong, Mapo-gu Seoul, , Korea People s Republic of China Contact: Phone: Mail: Honeywell Global TAC China Honeywell (China) Co., Ltd 33/F, Tower A, City Center, 100 Zunyi Rd. Shanghai , People s Republic of China Global-TAC-China@honeywell.com Singapore Taiwan Contact: Phone: Fascimile: Mail: Contact: Phone: Fascimile: Mail: Honeywell Global TAC South East Asia Honeywell Private Limited Honeywell Building 17, Changi Business Park Central 1 Singapore GTAC-SEA@honeywell.com Honeywell Global TAC Taiwan Honeywell Taiwan Ltd. 17F-1, No. 260, Jhongshan 2nd Road. Cianjhen District Kaohsiung, Taiwan, ROC Global-TAC-Taiwan@honeywell.com R200 SoftMaster User's Guide v January 2011 Honeywell

6 Support and Other Contacts Japan Contact: Phone: Fascimile: Mail: Honeywell Global TAC Japan Honeywell Japan Inc. New Pier Takeshiba, South Tower Building, 20th Floor, Kaigan, Minato-ku, Tokyo , Japan Elsewhere Call your nearest Honeywell office. World Wide Web Honeywell Solution Support Online: Training Classes Honeywell Automation College: vi SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

7 Acronyms and Definitions Acronyms and Definitions Acronym/Term Definition A/D Base BCD Cold restart CPU D/A Direct variable Analog to Digital Conversion Base is the back plane of the PLC on which the power supply, communication and other modules gets installed For example: main base, expansion base. Binary coded decimal This is one of the CPU restart modes which affects the variable parameters of the I/O image area when the CPU is restarted. With the CPU restart mode set to cold restart, all the parameters (like the internal register, timer, and counter) initialize to zero. Central processing unit Digital to analog conversion Memory area which can be directly accessed with IEC standard addressing notations with or without any variable name. They are %I (input), %Q (output), and %M (internal flags and registers) variables. Address Examples: %IX0.0.2, %QW1.2.1, and %MD1234 Dnet FEnet FO Function Function block HSL DeviceNet Network. Fast Ethernet Network. Fiber Optic Is an operation unit that immediately outputs the operation results for an input such as four arithmetical operations and comparative operations. Is an operation unit that memorizes the operation results within the commands such as timer and counter or results derived from several scans. Function blocks are the fundamental element for logic programs. Function blocks like timer and counter have input and output connections to indicate the flow. High-Speed Link Service in MasterLogic-200 communication modules. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide vii January 2011 Honeywell

8 Acronyms and Definitions Acronym/Term Definition I/O I/O image area IEC Interrupt task KB K LSB MB ML-200 Module MSB O/S P2P PAC PLC PLC system Pnet Input/Output Internal memory area of CPU module installed to maintain I/O states. International Electrotechnical Commission Interrupt driven task programs executed on meeting a given condition, in addition, to regular scan programs. It consists of two types: Timer interrupt task Internal flag interrupt task Kilo bytes Kilo steps Least significant bit Mega bytes MasterLogic-200 A standard component with a specific function to configure a system, such as the I/O board assembled to be inserted into the base motherboard. For example: CPU module, power module, and I/O module. Most significant bit Operating system Point to point service in MasterLogic-200 communication modules Process automation controller Programmable logic controller A system consisting of a PLC, CPU, modules, and peripherals, configured to be controlled by a user program. Profibus-DP network. viii SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

9 Acronyms and Definitions Acronym/Term RAM RTC RTC Snet SoftMaster STP Symbolic variable TP UTP Warm restart Watchdog timer Random access memory Definition As an abbreviation of real time clock, it is collectively referred as a universal IC, with the function of a clock. Real time clock Serial link network. Programming tool for creating, editing, and debugging a program. Shielded twisted pair Named variables which are declared with a name, type, but address is automatically allocated in symbolic memory area (%A) by the CPU. For instance, named variables declared as Valve1, Pump2 or Speed3 with any IEC standard data type. Twisted pair cables (typically CAT5 cables with RJ45 connectors for Ethernet communication) Unshield twisted pair This is one of the CPU restart modes which affects the variable parameters of the I/O image area when the CPU is restarted. When the CPU restart mode is set to warm restart, all the parameters (like the internal register, timer and counter) retain the previous values. A timer to monitor pre-determined execution time of a program and to generate a warning, when it is not complete within the time. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide ix January 2011 Honeywell

10 Symbol Definitions Symbol Definitions The following table lists the symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions. Symbol Definition ATTENTION: Identifies information that requires special consideration. TIP: Identifies advice or hints for the user, often in terms of performing a task. REFERENCE -EXTERNAL: Identifies an additional source of information outside of the bookset. REFERENCE - INTERNAL: Identifies an additional source of information within the bookset. CAUTION Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, may result in equipment or work (data) on the system being damaged or lost, or may result in the inability to properly operate the process. CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the product manual for additional information. The symbol appears next to required information in the manual. WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in serious injury or death. WARNING symbol on the equipment refers the user to the product manual for additional information. The symbol appears next to required information in the manual. WARNING, Risk of electrical shock: Potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms, 42.4 Vpeak, or 60 VDC may be accessible. x SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

11 Symbol Definitions Symbol Definition ESD HAZARD: Danger of an electro-static discharge to which equipment may be sensitive. Observe precautions for handling electrostatically sensitive devices. Protective Earth (PE) terminal: Provided for connection of the protective earth (green or green/yellow) supply system conductor. Functional earth terminal: Used for non-safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements. Earth Ground: Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements. Chassis Ground: Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xi January 2011 Honeywell

12 Symbol Definitions xii SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

13 Contents 1. INTRODUCTION Features of SoftMaster System requirements INSTALLATION Installing SoftMaster Installing the USB device driver Verifying the USB device driver installation BASIC APPLICATION SoftMaster user interface Menu bar Tool bar Status display line Change view window Edit functions Cut paste Copy paste Drag and drop Zooming in/zooming out Shortcut keys Configuring shortcut keys Shortcut keys Customizing SoftMaster Configuring SoftMaster options Configuring LD option Configuring SFC option Configuring ST option PROJECT CONFIGURATION Overview of project configuration Project configuration window R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xiii January 2011 Honeywell

14 Contents Symbol Definitions 4.2 Project management Creating a new project Opening the project Opening a project from PLC Saving a project Saving project as Project item Add item Adding a program Exporting to file Importing from file Changing program execution sequence Comparing projects Project password Setting project password Deleting password VARIABLES Overview of variables Global/direct variable Global variable Direct variable comments Flag Global/direct variable edit Global/direct variable registration Copy, cut, delete, and paste Changing variable name Insert line Delete line Drag and drop Export to file Preview Print Other functions Local variable Local variable registration Editing a local variable Function block variable FB variable FB variable edit FB variable registration xiv SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

15 Contents Symbol Definitions 5.6 FUNCTION variable FUN variable FUN variable edit FUN variable registration Editing variables Variable registration User-defined function/function block Creating user-defined function/function block program Creating user-defined function/function block I/O variable User-defined function/function block programming Using user-defined function/function blocks LD EDIT Overview Limits Program edit Edit tools Input contact point Input OR contact point Entering variable/address Inserting lines Inserting coil Inserting a function block Favorite function block Entering comments Input label Insert extension function Insert cell Insert line Delete item Delete cell Delete line Copy/cut/paste Undo and redo Program edit mode Viewing program options View IL program Program magnification change View address View variables View address/variables View address/comment R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xv January 2011 Honeywell

16 Contents Symbol Definitions View variables/comments Adjust number of contact point LD view properties Additional edit function Optimize program Block mask instruction Bookmark Go to SFC EDIT Overview SFC program limitations Program edit Edit tools Input step/transition Input action Input block/transition Input label Input jump Create left branch Create right branch Edit step property Transition property property Edit block property Edit label property Jump property Set branch priority Erase branch priority Delete item Copy/cut/paste Cut/paste Undo and redo Program edit mode View program Program zoom in/out SFC property View block/action/transition list Open action/transition Address/variables Address/comments Adjust contact number xvi SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

17 Contents Symbol Definitions 7.5 Edit additional function Bookmark setting Go to PROGRAMMING Cross reference View all addresses Data sorting Output cross reference instantly Check duplicate coil instantly Used address Viewing used address View address uses Check program Check program setting Check result trace Logic error Grammar error FIND/REPLACE Find address Find next address Find all address Find text Finding text Find all text Address replacement Replace address Replace all addresses Text replacement Replace text string Replace all string Find again PARAMETERS Basic parameter Basic parameter setting R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xvii January 2011 Honeywell

18 Contents Symbol Definitions 10.2 I/O parameters Setting I/O parameters Base module setup Module information setting based on slots I/O parameter edit function Detailed module information setting I/O parameter print function ONLINE Connection options for the PLC Local connection setting Using the local RS-232C Using the local USB Remote 1 connect setting Remote 2 connect setting Online functions Connect Write Read Change mode Compare with PLC Reset PLC Clearing PLC data PLC information Password PLC history PLC error/warning Flash memory setting Force I/O setting Force I/O setting Forced I/O cancel Skip I/O setting Fault mask Module changing wizard MONITORING Monitoring Start/stop monitoring Change current value Pause/restart monitoring Pausing conditions LD program monitoring xviii SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

19 Contents Symbol Definitions Start/stop monitoring Variable monitoring Registering variable/comment Register all Register by user Drag and drop register from other windows View detailed/briefly Monitoring operations Find Print Alignment System monitoring Basic application Connect/disconnect System synchronization All I/O modules ON/OFF Selected I/O modules ON/OFF Change current value Information display of power module Information display of CPU module Information display of communication module Viewing information of special modules Start/stop monitoring Special module monitoring Save Open Navigate base Print preview Address monitoring Basic application Address areas Data format and display items Edit data Save address Open address Data value setting Clear data Write to PLC Read from PLC Write selected area on PLC Start/stop monitoring Change current value PLC type settings Screen zoom-in/zoom-out Automatic width/height adjustment R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xix January 2011 Honeywell

20 Contents Symbol Definitions View properties Page setting Special module monitoring Trend monitoring Configuring trend monitoring Start trend monitoring Setting trend graph Setting graph Setting graph window Graph function Scroll synchronization Data traces Connecting to PLC Trace setting Graph settings Trace Animation Graph function File function View function Custom events Overview of custom events Event setting Adding custom event item Event history DEBUGGING Start/stop debugging Start debugging Stop debugging LD program debugging Set remove breakpoints Go Go to cursor into, step out and step over functions List of break points Variable break Setting variable break Scan break Scan break run xx SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

21 Contents Symbol Definitions 14. ONLINE EDITING Online editing sequence Open project Connect Start monitoring Start online editing Edit Write modified program End online editing PRINTING Print project Printing a project Print setting Page setup Header/footer setting Cover setup LD program print Print setting Print preview USER FUNCTION/FUNCTION BLOCK Overview Create user function/function block Create user function/function block I/O variable User function/function block programming Working with user function/function block SOFTMASTER SIMULATOR Overview of the SoftMaster simulator (SIM) Features of SoftMaster-SIM System configuration for execution of SoftMaster-SIM Starting SoftMaster-SIM Program window configuration Configuring the program window Channel list Channel monitor R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xxi January 2011 Honeywell

22 Contents Symbol Definitions I/O condition I/O condition monitor Module simulation Digital I/O module Analog output module (D/A conversion module) High-speed counter module (HSC Module) RTD module Advanced positioning module (APM module) Limitations Watchdog timer Communication module ST EDITION Writing ST program Adding scan program Adding user function/function block Adding SFC transition, action Limit Editing program Shortcut keys Copy/paste Undo/redo Adding/selecting variable Inserting function/function block Viewing program ST option Font/color Zoom Tab Showing line numbers Additional edit functions Book mark Selection from character string list Selecting member variable from character string list Setting/removing block mask Setting/removing line block mask Indent/outdent EVENT INPUT MODULE Overview xxii SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

23 Contents Symbol Definitions Characteristics of SOE monitor Functions of the SOE monitor Files created in the SOE monitor Screen configuration Menu structure Tools SOE event history window Status bar Basic parameter setting Setting items I/O parameter setting Setting item Chatter setting View module information Event history monitor Example of event filter Prioritizing events Comparing events Deleting event history Save as an excel file DEDICATED ML200R FUNCTION Redundancy parameter Redundancy PLC state window Control redundancy Change of master CPU Standby CPU control System monitoring System configuration Node count change Base information Base changing wizard R200 SoftMaster User's Guide xxiii January 2011 Honeywell

24 Contents Symbol Definitions xxiv SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

25 1.1 Features of SoftMaster 1. Introduction SoftMaster is a software tool designed to program and debug the MasterLogic 200 PLC series. Following are some of the key features of SoftMaster. Multi-PLC, Multi-Program Edit, monitor, and manage ML200 PLCs included in a project. Enables multiple scan programs and task programs Drag and Drop option Easy and convenient editing with Drag and Drop function on most editors such as Project, Variable/Comment, LD Edit, Variable Monitor, and so on. Shortcut Keys The default shortcut keys provided are customizable. Message Windows Different message windows to edit and check programs. Convenient Variable/Comment Editing Option to edit using MS Excel. Edit option is available through View Variable, View Address, and View Flag. Auto-fill function to fill similar Variables Drag and Drop option on the Variable/Comment Windows. Convenient Program Edit Unlimited Undo/Redo function. Block Edit available in cell. Independent screen-level edit. Enhanced Find/Replace function. Block Mask function to prohibit execution in rung. Bookmark function for access to a specific location in a LD program. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 25 January 2011 Honeywell

26 1. Introduction 1.1. Features of SoftMaster Allows reference to memory of selected address when editing LD. Monitoring Functions Monitoring functions for variable monitoring, address monitoring, system monitoring, trend monitoring, special module monitoring. Custom Events Logging and reading data available if user-defined conditions are met for a specific address. Module Changing Wizard Easy and safe change of module during PLC RUN. 26 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

27 1. Introduction 1.2. System requirements 1.2 System requirements The following are the system requirements of SoftMaster. Item Personal computer and memory COM port Hard disk Monitor Operating System Specification A Pentium computer and 128MB memory RS-232C serial port or USB port At least 100MB or more space. Monitor should have 1024 x 768 and higher resolution Compatible with Windows XP/Vista/7 ATTENTION It is recommended to install SoftMaster on Windows XP or Windows Vista or Windows 7. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 27 January 2011 Honeywell

28 1. Introduction 1.2. System requirements 28 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

29 2.1 Installing SoftMaster 2. Installation To install SoftMaster, perform the following steps: 1 Double-click the SoftMaster.exe file from the location to execute the installation. Installation wizard displays and prepares for installation. 2 Click Next. The Customer Information page appears. 3 Type the User Name and name of the Organization. 4 Click Next. The Destination Folder page appears. In this page, you can either install in default location or specify the location to install SoftMaster. Click Change to install in different location. You can browse and select the required location. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 29 January 2011 Honeywell

30 2. Installation 2.1. Installing SoftMaster 5 Click Next. The Ready to Install Program page displays. Note: SoftMaster needs 30 MB of free disk space. In case of inadequate free space, you are prompted to select a disk with enough capacity. 6 Click Install to begin installation. The status bar displays the progress of the installation. All the program features selected are installed. Once the SoftMaster is successfully installed, the InstallShield Wizard Completed page displays. 7 Click Finish to exit from the wizard. 30 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

31 2. Installation 2.2. Installing the USB device driver 2.2 Installing the USB device driver If you are installing SoftMaster, you may need to install the USB device driver separately. Perform the following steps to install USB Device driver. ATTENTION When you install a SoftMaster, a Drivers sub-folder is created under the folder where SoftMaster is installed and there are two driver files, GmUSBD.sys and GmUSBD.inf in the Drivers folder. If there is no folder or driver file, reinstall the SoftMaster. 1 Turn PLC power ON and connect USB device to the PC. If the connection is established, the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears. 2 Click Install from a list or specific location (Advanced) option and then click Next. The Search and Installation page displays. 3 Select Search for the best driver in these locations and Include this location in the search options. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 31 January 2011 Honeywell

32 2. Installation 2.2. Installing the USB device driver 4 Click Browse. The Browse For Folder dialog box displays, select Drivers folder where SoftMaster is installed. 5 Click OK. Then, the system searches for the driver files in the selected folder. 6 When the most suitable device driver is found, system prompts and begins to install the selected device driver. Since, USB device driver operates stably based on Windows OS, click Continue Anyway. Once the device driver is installed completely, the Installation Complete page displays. 7 Click Finish to exit from the wizard. Verifying the USB device driver installation If USB connection is not available, check the installation status of the device driver as follows: 1 On the desktop, right-click My Computer and click Manage. The Computer Management window appears. 2 In the left pane, choose Computer Management (Local) > System Tools > Device Manager. The items displayed in the right pane may be different according to the devices installed on the computer. 32 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

33 2. Installation 2.2. Installing the USB device driver Normal case If the USB device driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC is installed successfully, the Honeywell MasterLogic Series item appears under Universal Serial Bus Controller as shown in the following figure. Abnormal case If the device driver is not installed successfully, then the Honeywell MasterLogic Series item does not appear under Universal Serial Bus Controller as shown in the following figure. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 33 January 2011 Honeywell

34 2. Installation 2.2. Installing the USB device driver If the USB driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC is not installed successfully, then reinstall the USB driver for MasterLogic 200 PLC using the following steps. 1 Right-click the device driver item and click Update Driver from the context menu. 2 The Found New Hardware Wizard displays. Click Installation from a list or specific location (Advanced) option and then click Next. Then, follow the same steps as in section Installing the USB device driver. 34 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

35 3. Basic application 3.1 SoftMaster user interface The following is an illustration of the SoftMaster user interface. The user interface of SoftMaster can be described as follows: UI area Description A B Menu bar: It is the basic menu bar of SoftMaster. Tool bar: The toolbar below the menu bar contains buttons and commands to access frequently used tasks. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 35 January 2011 Honeywell

36 3. Basic application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface UI area Description C D E F G Project window: Displays the components of the currently open project. Variable Monitoring window: Used to register and monitor variables. Status bar: Display the status of SoftMaster, the information of the connected PLC, and so on. Edit window: Displays the current Edit window. Message window: Displays messages when the SoftMaster is in use. Menu bar Project Selecting a menu item displays the options under the menu. Click a menu item and select an option from the drop-down list of menu options. You can also access the menu using the shortcut keys. The following table lists the project menu options with their description: Menu option Description New Project Open Project Open from PLC Save Project Save As Close Project Creates a new project. Opens an existing project. Uploads the project and program stored in PLC. Saves the project. Enables you to save the project with a different name. Closes the project. Add Item PLC Adds a new PLC to the project. Task Program Function Adds a new task program to the project. Adds a new scan program to the project. Adds a new function to the project. 36 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

37 3. Basic application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface Menu option Function Block Data type Description Adds a new function block to the project. Adds a new data type to the project. Import Item from File Export to File PLC Global Variables/Address Program I/O parameter Basic parameter Function/FB Imports the PLC program from the file. Imports global variables/address from the file. Imports the program from the file. Imports the I/O parameter from the file. Imports the basic parameter from the file. Imports the function/fb from the file. Exports the selected item on the project window into the file. Save Variable Names to File Compare Projects Print Preview Print Project Print Setup Exit Saves variable names to a file. Compares two projects stored in the PC and displays its result. Prints the active window s details. Displays a preview of the screen to be printed. Enables selection of a project item for printing. Sets the printer options. Close the SoftMaster. Edit The following table lists the edit menu options with their description. Menu option Description Undo Redo Cancels the edit on Program Edit Window to recover its previous status. Recovers the edit cancelled using Undo. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 37 January 2011 Honeywell

38 3. Basic application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface Menu option Description Cut Copy Paste Delete Select All Insert Mode Insert Line Delete Line Insert Cell Delete Cell Register Special/Communication Module Variables Optimize Program Insert Comment/Label Set Block Mask Remove Block Mask Copies the selected block to clipboard and deletes the block. Copies the selected block to the clipboard. Copies from the clipboard and pastes on the Edit window. Deletes the selected block or items. Selects all block in the currently active window. Changes program edit mode to insert mode. Adds a new line to the cursor position. Deletes the line from the cursor position. Adds a cell available to the cursor position. Deletes a cell from the cursor position. Registers special module variables in global variables list and deletes previous list. Optimizes the program automatically. Inserts a comment or label in the cursor position. Sets cursor-positioned rung or specified block area block mask in rung unit. Removes cursor-positioned rung or specified block area set in block mask. Bookmark Set/Remove Sets or removes a bookmark. Remove All Previous Bookmark Next Bookmark Cancels all the bookmarks specified. Moves to the previous bookmark. Moves to the next bookmark. 38 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

39 3. Basic application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface Menu option Description Tools Edit tools for each program are available. Find/replace The following table lists the find/replace menu options with their description. Menu Option Description Find Address Find Text Replace Address Replace Text Find Again Finds variable address. Searches for variable based on the variable name. Replaces variable address with another address. Replaces variable name with some other text. Searches again. Go To /line Moves the cursor to the position of a specific step/line. Rung comment Label END command Moves the cursor to the position of a specific rung comment. Moves the cursor to the position of a specific label. Moves the cursor to the position of END command. Previous Message Next Message Moves from the current message window to the previous message window. Moves from the current message window to the next message window. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 39 January 2011 Honeywell

40 3. Basic application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface View The following table lists the view menu options with their description. Menu Description IL Project Window Message Window Variable Monitoring Window Instruction Window Cross Reference Used Address Check Program Variables Address Flags Address/Variables Address/Comments Variables/Comments Zoom-In Zoom-Out Resize Width Converts to IL View during LD Edit. Shows or hides the project window. Shows or hides the message window. Shows or hides the variable monitor window. Shows or hides the instruction window. Displays the used-memory information on the message window s Cross Reference tab. Lists all the memory addresses which are used in the program. Checks the program and displays its result on the message window s Check Program tab. Displays the variable name in the program. Indicates the memory address. Indicates default system defined flags. Displays the address and the variable in the program. Displays the address and the comment in the program. Displays the variable and the comment in the program. Magnifies the window. Reduces the window. Automatically adjusts the cell width to the string width in the variable/comment window. 40 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

41 3. Basic application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface Menu Description Resize Height Full Screen Properties LD Properties Change Columns Open Local Variables Open User Function Open Program Automatically adjusts the cell height applicably to the string height in the LD or variable/comment window. Enlarges the program window or variable/comment window applicably to the whole screen. Displays the registered information of the selected item on the project window. Displays the LD properties in the program. Increase or decrease the columns in the program screen. Converts from the program screen to the local variable screen. Opens the user-defined program. Converts from the local variable screen to the program screen. Online The following table lists the online menu options with their description. Menu Connect/Disconnect Connection Settings Description Connects or disconnects with PLC. Specifies the connection method. Change Mode Run Changes PLC mode. Stop Debug Read Write Compare with PLC Reads parameter/program/comment from PLC. Writes parameter/program/comment on PLC. Compares the project to the project saved in PLC. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 41 January 2011 Honeywell

42 3. Basic application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface Menu Set Flash Memory Reset PLC Clear PLC PLC Information PLC History PLC Errors/Warnings I/O Information Save PLC History Force I/O Skip I/O Fault Mask Module Changing Wizard Base Changing Wizard Start Online Editing Write Modified Program End Online Editing Description Copies the program into PLC flash memory if enabled. Resets PLC. Deletes parameter/program/comment saved in PLC. Displays PLC information. Displays PLC history. Displays PLC error/warning information. Displays PLC I/O information Saves PLC history Displays the window for compulsory I/O setting. Displays the window for I/O skip setting. Displays the window for fault mask setting. Displays the dialog window to change the modules. Changes base while PLC is operating. Displays the dialog box to edit the program online when the PLC is running. Displays the dialog box to download the edited program online when the PLC is running. The modified program gets activated online. This ends the online editing session and the program comes back to normal operation. 42 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

43 3. Basic application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface Monitor The following table lists the monitor menu options with their description. Menu Start/Stop Monitoring Pause Resume Pausing Conditions Change Current Value System Monitoring Address Monitoring Special Module Monitoring Trend Monitoring PID Monitoring SOE Monitoring Custom Events Data Traces Description Starts or stops the monitor. Temporarily stops the monitor. Restarts the monitor temporarily stopped. Specifies conditions for the monitor temporary stop. Specifies the address value being monitored. Executes the system monitor. Execute the address monitor window which shows all memory area addresses. Executes the special module monitor. Executes the trend monitor. Monitors all or individual PID block. Monitors the events which are entered into the CPU and the event input modules. Specifies the custom events. Specifies the address to monitor the change of the data. Debug The following table lists the debug menu options with their description. Menu Start/Stop Debugging Go Description Converts debug mode to Start/Stop Debugging. Runs to the break point. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 43 January 2011 Honeywell

44 3. Basic application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface Menu Description Over Into Out Go to Cursor Set/Remove Breakpoints Breakpoints List Breakpoint Conditions Runs step by step. Debugs the subroutine. Escapes from the subroutine. Runs to the cursor position. Sets or cancels the break point. Displays the list of the break points specified. Specifies the break conditions. Tools The following table lists the tools menu options with their description. Menu Network Manager Start/End Simulator Customize Shortcut Settings Options Create Host ID Description Shows the PLC network and specifies the parameter. Starts or ends the simulator. Enables to set tools and options. User specifies the shortcut keys. Enables to customize the SoftMaster environment as per the user preference. This creates the host ID file. Host ID is required to get the license. Window The following table lists the window menu options with their description. Menu Description New Window Split Opens a new window on the active window. Splits the Project window. 44 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

45 3. Basic application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface Menu Description Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Arrange Icons Close All Arranges the several windows of SoftMaster in steps. Arranges the several windows of SoftMaster horizontally. Arranges the several windows of SoftMaster vertically. Arranges the icons of SoftMaster. Closes all the windows of SoftMaster. Help The following table lists the help menu options with their description. Instruction SoftMaster Help Instruction Help About SoftMaster Description Opens Help for SoftMaster application. Opens Help for PLC instructions. Displays SoftMaster information. Tool bar SoftMaster provides shortcut icons for frequently used menus on the tool bar. Click the required tool to execute. Creating a custom tool bar Perform the following steps to create a custom tool bar. 1 Click Tools > Customize. The Customize dialog box displays. Select the tool bars to show/hide. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 45 January 2011 Honeywell

46 3. Basic application 3.1. SoftMaster user interface 2 Click New. The New Toolbar dialog box displays. 3 Type a name for the new tool bar. 4 Click OK to create a tool bar with no tools. Filling the tool box This menu is used to populate the tool box created with custom tools. Perform the following steps to fill the tool box. 1 Select the Command tab on the Customize dialog box. 2 Select the menus that you want as a part of the new tool bar. 3 Click OK to create the new tool bar. Status display line As depicted in the following illustration, the Status Display line is used to display the following: Legend Tool tip of selected toolbar item Name of the PLC PLC Mode display Description Used to display the comment of the selected menu, instruction or mouse-positioned tool box. Indicates the name of the selected PLC name. If a project has several PLCs, online-related instructions are applied to the PLC displayed here (Example: New PLC). Used to display the PLC mode. If several PLCs are in a project, the selected PLC s mode is displayed (Example: Run). 46 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

47 3. Basic application 3.2. Edit functions Legend Warning Display Cursor Position Mode Description Indicates the error status in the PLC (Example: R1, Ethernet, OK). Indicates the cursor position when a program is edited (Example: Row 9, Column 5). Indicates the insert mode or overwrite mode. Change view window All the windows (such as project window, result window, and so on.) available in view menu are composed of docking windows. Use the mouse to adjust the position and the size of the windows or to hide the windows. Change to open window Right-click the window and choose Float In Main Window from the context menu. Hide Right-click on a window and choose Hide from the context menu. 3.2 Edit functions Cut paste Copy paste These functions are available in LD, IL, Variable/Comment, Variable Monitor, and Project Window. Variable/Comment and Excel can share the edited details with each other. Cut > Paste menu is used to move the data of the selected area to a new position to paste the data on. Copy > Paste menu is used to create data identical to the data of the selected area. In case the variable name is duplicated as described in Variable/Comment, an applicable warning message appears. For more details refer to the comment of each edit window. Drag and drop Drag and Drop is used to apply either Cut > Paste or Copy > Paste. When dragging and dropping in a same area such as same LD or IL window, it applies Cut > Paste; if R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 47 January 2011 Honeywell

48 3. Basic application 3.3. Shortcut keys dragging and dropping with two and more SoftMaster Program instances opened, it applies Copy > Paste. TIP Cut, Copy and Paste can be also controlled by the context menu in Edit window. Copy/Paste in Variable/Comment or LD/IL Edit is verified for the duplication by the program. However, it should be also checked manually by a user. Program does not respond if Cut, Copy or Paste is operated in an unavailable area. Cut, Copy or Paste from/to different areas may cause fatal program errors. Auto conversion function is not provided when Cut, Copy or Paste is attempted from/to different areas. Therefore, a user should check the pasted area. Zooming in/zooming out This function is used for magnifying or reducing the edit window. The applicable magnification rate changes by a minimum of 5% within the range of 50% ~ 200%. To zoom-in/zoom-out, select View > Zoom In or View > Zoom Out on the menu as necessary or use the combo box to select or enter a specific magnification rate or press Ctrl and use the mouse wheel to adjust magnification rate. 48 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

49 3. Basic application 3.3. Shortcut keys 3.3 Shortcut keys Configuring shortcut keys Shortcut keys can be specified for all the instructions. When you set new shortcut keys for a task the existing shortcut key is deleted. Perform the following steps to set the shortcut key for an instruction: 1 Click Tools > Shortcut Settings. The Shortcut Keys window displays. Field Label Select a macro Create Shortcut Remove Reset All Description Used to select the menu to specify its shortcut key on the list. Used to create a shortcut key for the selected menu. Deletes the specified shortcut key. Deletes all the shortcut keys specified and resets all to default. Shortcut keys 2 From the Select a macro list, select the menu to specify its shortcut key. 3 Click Create Shortcut. The Assign Shortcut window displays. 4 Set the shortcut key. For example, to apply Alt + Z, press Alt and Z on the keyboard. A shortcut key is displayed on the Edit Window. If this key association is already used, a menu applicable to the specified shortcut key is displayed. 5 Click OK to save the shortcut. Shortcut Keys Home End Ctrl + Home Ctrl + End Comment Used to move to the starting point in the row. Used to move to the end of the row. Used to move to the first cell position. Used to move to the last cell position. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 49 January 2011 Honeywell

50 3. Basic application 3.3. Shortcut keys Shortcut Keys Shift + Ctrl + Home Shift + Ctrl + End Shift + Page Up Shift + Page Down Shift + Tab, Shift + Enter Tab, Enter Ctrl + Enter Comment To select from the current to the previous cells. To select from the current to the last cells. To select from the cell to the page up position. To select from the cell to the page down position. Used to move to the next cell (right->left, bottom->top), and to move to the last cell in the first row. Used to move to the next cell (left->right, top->bottom). A new line is created after the last row. Multi-line is entered in the comment column. 50 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

51 3. Basic application 3.4. Customizing SoftMaster 3.4 Customizing SoftMaster This function enables you to configure the default folder for storing projects, to set a common editor, and configure the font/color for LD, SFC, and ST Category: Enables to configure the default folder for storing projects, to set a common editor, and configure the font/color for LD, SFC, and ST. 2. Contents: If you select a particular category, it displays contents for the corresponding category. 3. Buttons: These buttons are used to apply the setting, cancel the setting, to reset all the setting, and to exit from options window. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 51 January 2011 Honeywell

52 3. Basic application 3.4. Customizing SoftMaster Configuring SoftMaster options Perform the following steps to configure custom options for SoftMaster. 1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays. 2 Select SoftMaster in the Option window. The following table provides a brief description of SoftMaster settings. Field Label Default folder for new projects Select Folder Number of backup file(s) Number of recent projects to display Open previous project when starting the SoftMaster. Integrated connection and file with SoftMaster-NM Description Location where the new project is created. By default, the location is C:\SoftMaster\. You can also set the location where the new project has to be created. Searches the required folder where the new project has to be created. Sets the backup file number to restore the project file. You can set up to a maximum of 20. Sets the number of recently opened project file. You can set up to a maximum of 20. Click Project > Recent Project to view the recently opened projects. If you select this option, SoftMaster automatically opens the last file used when SoftMaster starts. If you select this option, when executing SoftMaster-NM through SoftMaster menu, make a connection option of SoftMaster and PLC name displayed at SoftMaster- NM. 3 Click OK. 52 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

53 3. Basic application 3.4. Customizing SoftMaster Setting common editor Perform the following steps to display the common editor. 1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays. 2 Select Common Editor in the Option window and select the options you want to change. The following table provides a brief description of common editor settings. Field Label Output cross reference instantly Check duplicated coil instantly Instant input mode Show line numbers Show grid Description If you select this option then when editing the LD program, displays automatically the cross reference contents for the selected address. When this option is not selected, select View > Cross Reference and check the memory usage result. If you select this option it checks the duplicated coils during editing and displays it in the result window. If you select this option then when the user enters some contact, the address input window for the user to enter the address displays. When this option is not selected, then the user double-clicks the contact or presses Enter with cursor on the contact to edit it. Displays line number. Displays grid. 3 Click OK. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 53 January 2011 Honeywell

54 3. Basic application 3.4. Customizing SoftMaster SoftMaster font/color option This option enables to change font/color used in the editing window. You can also set the font color for LD, SFC, and ST. Perform the following steps to change the font/color. 1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays. 2 Select Font/Color in the Option window and select the options you want to change. The following table provides a brief description of font and color settings. Field Label Description Items Font Color Default Preview The items that you want to change the font/color. It is activated when the item is Text font. It designates text font. It is activated when item is not Text font. It designates color. Restore the default value. Displays the current setting status. 3 Click OK. SoftMaster online option This option enables you to specify the SoftMaster online-related options. Perform the following steps to specify the online-related options. 1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays. 2 Select Online in the Option window. Type: Sets monitor display type of data value. Example: If you select hexadecimal, variable is displayed as hexadecimal number when monitoring. 54 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

55 3. Basic application 3.4. Customizing SoftMaster Type Example function block ADD Unsigned decimal Signed decimal Hexadecimal - As instruction R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 55 January 2011 Honeywell

56 3. Basic application 3.4. Customizing SoftMaster As variable View connection settings when connecting: Display automatically the specified details of the connection with PLC when connected. If you select this option then the following dialog box appears whenever PLC is connected. Show Message when changing the PLC mode: When changing the PLC, select this option to display the conversion message automatically. When changing stop mode to run mode, the following message displays. Contrary, when changing run mode to stop mode, the following message displays. 56 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

57 3. Basic application 3.4. Customizing SoftMaster Configuring LD option This option enables you to can change text and column width of LD editor. Perform the following steps to display the LD option. 1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays. 2 Select LD from the Options window. The following table provides a brief description of LD settings. Field Label Display above text Display below text Display Description When displaying text above diagram, you can decide whether to display height of text as variable type according to the number of character or as fixed type according to setting. When displaying text below diagram, you can decide whether to display height of text as variable type according to the number of character or as fixed type according to setting. Specified column width of LD diagram. 3 Click OK. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 57 January 2011 Honeywell

58 3. Basic application 3.4. Customizing SoftMaster LD font/color option This option enables you to can change the Font/Color used in LD editor. Perform the following steps, to set the LD font/color option. 1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays. 2 Select Font/Color in LD category and select the options you want to change. The following table provides a brief description of font and color settings. Field Label Description Items Font Color Default Preview The items that you want to change the font/color. It is activated when the item is Text font. It designates text font. It is activated when item is not Text font. It designates color. Restores the default value for the selected item. Displays the setting value of the selected item. 3 Click OK. Configuring SFC option This option is used when editing SFC program. Perform the following steps to display the SFC option. 1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays. 2 Select SFC from the Options window. 58 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

59 3. Basic application 3.4. Customizing SoftMaster The following table provides a brief description of SFC settings. Field Label Show comment Show print area Show page number column width column width Utilize SFC split window Split window position Split window contents Description Shows comment of step, transition, action and block. Shows printable area with the thick dotted line. Shows page number in printable area Specifies column width of step, transition. Specifies column width of action. You can use SFC split window. Decides split widow position. Decides which content to display. ATTENTION Range of step column width is 20~200. Range of action column width is 70~ Click OK. SFC font/color option This option enables you to change font/color used in SFC editor. Perform the following steps to set the SFC font/color option. 1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays. 2 Select Font/Color in SFC category and select the options you want to change. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 59 January 2011 Honeywell

60 3. Basic application 3.4. Customizing SoftMaster The following table provides a brief description of font and color settings. Field Label Description Items Font Color Default Preview The items that you want to change the font/color. It is activated when the item is Text font. It designates text font. It is activated when item is not Text font. It designates color. Restores default value for selected item. Displays the setting value of the selected item. 3 Click OK. Configuring ST option This option is used in editing ST program. Perform the following steps to display the ST option. 1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays. 2 Select ST from the Options window. The following table provides a brief description of ST settings. Field Label Parameter information Auto list members Auto macro statement Description Provides parameter information, exclusive of 2MLK CPU. When you enter character with keyboard, it shows instruction and variable starting with the entered character. When you enter control statement such as IF, WHILE, SWITCH and press Enter, it completes the statement according to ST grammar. 60 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

61 3. Basic application 3.4. Customizing SoftMaster Tab size Auto indent Enhance Specifies space length when you press Tab key. When you change line with Enter key, it indents automatically as many as previous tab size. Shows character string with diverse color according to variable, reserved word, comment, and instruction. 3 Click OK. ST font/color option This option enables you to can change Font/Color used in ST editor. Perform the following steps, to set the ST font/color option. 1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays. 2 Select Font/Color in ST category and select the options you want to change. The following table provides a brief description of font and color settings. Field Label Description Items Font Color Default Preview The items that you want to change the font/color It is activated when the item is Text font. It designates text font. It is activated when item is not Text font. It designates color. Restore default value for selected item. Displays the setting value of the selected item. 3 Click OK. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 61 January 2011 Honeywell

62 3. Basic application 3.4. Customizing SoftMaster 62 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

63 4. Project Configuration 4.1 Overview of project configuration Project configuration window The following are the components of the project configuration window. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 63 January 2011 Honeywell

64 4. Project Configuration 4.1. Overview of project configuration Legend Item Name Description a Project Used to specify the whole system. Several related PLCs can be included in one project. b PLC Displays the system applicable to a CPU module. c Global/Direct Variables Global variable declaration and direct variable text can be edited and viewed. d Parameter Used to specify the details on operation and configuration of PLC system. e Basic Parameters Used to specify the basic operation. f I/O Parameters Used to specify the I/O module configuration. g User Data type Defines the structure type. h Scan Program Used as the folder for all the programs. i New program Folder for local variables and user written scan programs. j Scan Program 2 Folder for local variables and user written scan programs. k Task1 User-defined task with a fixed cycle. l Task Program1 Folder for local variables and user written task programs. m User function/function block Custom function/function block created by the user. n Function1 Folder for local variables and user written functions. TIP A project can include several PLCs. This way, SoftMaster can be used to conveniently manage and monitor several PLCs simultaneously. 64 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

65 4. Project Configuration 4.2. Project management 4.2 Project management Creating a new project This option enables you to create a new project. A folder with a name identical to the project name is created and the project file is saved in this folder. 1 Click Project > New Project. The New Project window displays. The following table provides a brief description about New Project window fields. Field Label Project name File directory Select Folder PLC series CPU type Program name Program language Project description Description You can enter the project name, which is the name of the project file. The extension of the project file is xgp. A folder with the name identical to the project name as specified by the user when created and the project file is stored in this folder. Browse to select a folder to store the project file. Select ML-200, ML-50, ML-200 IEC, or ML- 200R as the PLC type. Select the type of CPU Enter the name of a program included in the project. Select the program language as LD, SFC, or ST. Enter a description for the project. TIP When you create a new project, it is stored in a folder with a name that is identical to the project name. The extension of.xgp is automatically attached to the project file if it is not specified. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 65 January 2011 Honeywell

66 4. Project Configuration 4.2. Project management Opening the project Perform the following steps to open an existing project. 1 Click Project > Open Project. The Open dialog box displays. 2 Select a Project and click Open. Note: When you select a project, the user-defined comment appears in the comment section of the dialog box. This helps in selecting projects. Opening a project from PLC This option enables you to create a new project, by reading the project stored in PLC. If the project is already open in SoftMaster, the project is closed to create a new project. Perform the following steps to create a new project. 1 Click Project > Open from PLC. The Online Settings window displays. 2 Select an object to connect and click OK. For details on connection settings, refer to Connect Options in Online functions. 3 A new project is created. TIP Click Project > Save Project to save the project read from the PLC in the PC. Click Online > Read to read the items of PLC and to import to the currently open Project. Saving a project This option enables you to save changes in a project. To save a Project, on the menu bar, click Project > Save Project. 66 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

67 4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project item TIP If items in the project have changed and need to be saved, * displays beside the project name in the Project Window. Saving project as This option enables you to save the project in a different file name. Perform the following steps to save the project, with a different file name: 1 Click Project > Save As. The Save As window displays. 2 Enter a new project file name and select a folder, where you want to save the project file. The following table provides a brief description about Save As window fields. Field Label File name File directory Select Folder Description You can enter the name of the project. The project file is stored in this name. The extension of the project file is.xgp. The last saved file path displays for saving the current file. In case you save it for first time, the default folder name displays which is identical to the name of the project. Browse to select a folder to store the project file. 3 Click OK. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 67 January 2011 Honeywell

68 4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project item 4.3 Project item Add item You can add a PLC, task, and program into the project. Perform the following steps to add PLC. 1 On the Project Window, select the Project Item. 2 Click Project > Add Item >PLC. The PLC window displays. 3 Type the PLC name and PLC description and select PLC type from the dropdown list. Click OK to create a new PLC. TIP SoftMaster allows the user to specify the project and to include several PLCs in one project for convenient program management. 68 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

69 4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project item Add task Perform the following steps to add a task. 1 On the Project Window, select the PLC Item. 2 Click Project > Add Item > Task. The Task window displays. 3 Type the Task name, Task number and select Priority, Execution Condition. Click OK to create a new Task. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 69 January 2011 Honeywell

70 4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project item The following table provides a brief description about Task window fields. Task name Priority Task number Field Label Execution condition Internal address execution condition Address Word address start condition Bit address start condition Description You can enter the name of the task. The name must not include special characters. Used to specify the priority of the tasks. A lower figure indicates a higher priority. Lower the figure, higher is the priority. It is a unique number used to identify and manage the tasks in PLC. The Task number can change based on the Execution condition (For Example, Fixed Cycle: 0 ~ 31) Used to specify the execution condition under which the task is executed. Setting items are different according to the type of internal address. Used to enter the address which is used as the start condition of task program. Enter BIT or WORD address according to the condition to execute the task program. The start condition is specified if WORD type of the internal address start condition is selected. The start condition is specified if BIT type of the internal address start condition is selected. 70 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

71 4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project item TIP Execution condition may be different according to the PLC type. Initialization: The initialization task is executed when the PLC mode is changed from STOP to RUN. It is executed until the _INIT_DONE (F10250) Flag is ON. And while the initialization task is executed, the programs (including the Scan Program) which belong to other tasks is not executed. Fixed Cycle: The task is executed at the specified intervals of time. Enter the time in ms unit. External contact point: The task is executed if specified external contact point is ON. The relative external address should be entered. For example, %P Internal address: The task is executed based on the status of internal address. The setup item is different according to the type of internal address. REFERENCE - INTERNAL For additional information on the operation and details of the task, see 2MLK CPU manual. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 71 January 2011 Honeywell

72 4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project item Adding a program Perform the following steps to add a Program. 1 On the Project Window, select the program location to add. The program can be added to Scan Program or Task Item. 2 Click Project > Add Item > Program. The Program window displays. 3 Type the Program Name, Program Description, and select language. Click OK to create a program. Exporting to file The following items can be saved as separate item files. Item File Extension PLC Global/direct variables I/O parameter Basic parameter Program Use function/function block plc gdv iop bsp prg fun 72 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

73 4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project item Exporting PLC configuration Perform the following steps to export a PLC. 1 On the Project Window, select the PLC item. 2 Click Project > Export to File > PLC. The Open dialog box displays. 3 Enter the file name and then click OK. Exporting variable/comment Perform the following steps to export a variable/comment. 1 On the Project Window, select the variable/comment item. 2 Click Project > Export to File > Variable/Comment. The Open dialog box displays. 3 Enter the file name and then click OK. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 73 January 2011 Honeywell

74 4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project item Exporting I/O parameters Perform the following steps to export I/O parameters. 1 On the Project Window, select the I/O parameter item. 2 Click Project > Export to File > I/O Parameter. The Open dialog box displays. 3 Enter the file name and then click OK. Exporting basic parameters Perform the following steps to export basic parameters. 1 On the Project Window, select the basic parameter item. 2 Click Project > Export to File > Basic Parameter. The Open dialog box displays. 3 Enter the file name and then click OK. Exporting a program Perform the following steps to export a program. 1 On the Project Window, select the program item. 2 Click Project > Export to File > Program. The Open dialog box displays. 3 Enter the file name and then click OK. TIP Items can be easily copied or moved between the projects using the Drag and Drop function. Drag and Drop function is available between projects, when two SoftMaster projects are open. 74 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

75 4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project item Importing from file The following components can be saved as separate files and can be replaced by saved files. Item File extension PLC Global/direct variables I/O parameter Basic parameter Program User function/function block plc gdv iop bsp prg fun Imports item from saved item files. The contents from PLC, program is inserted into the project. Variable/comment, basic parameter, I/O parameter, and so on is overwritten on the previous item. TIP Since variable/comment, basic parameters, and I/O parameters are overwritten on the existing items; the content of the existing item is deleted. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 75 January 2011 Honeywell

76 4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project item Importing a PLC CPU configuration Perform the following steps to import a PLC CPU configuration. 1 On the Project Window, select the PLC item. 2 Click Project > Import Item from File > PLC. The Open dialog box displays. 3 Select the file and then click OK. Importing variable/comment Perform the following steps to import variable/comment. 1 On the Project Window, select the variable/comment item. 2 Click Project > Import Item from File > Global Variables/Address. The Open dialog box displays. 3 Select the file and then click OK. 76 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

77 4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project item Importing I/O parameter Perform the following steps to import an I/O parameter. 1 On the Project Window, select the I/O parameter item. 2 Click Project > Import Item from File > I/O Parameter. The Open dialog box displays. 3 Select the file and click OK. Importing basic parameter Perform the following steps to import basic parameter. 1 On the Project Window, select the basic parameter item. 2 Click Project > Import Item from File > Basic Parameter. The Open dialog box displays. 3 Select the file and then click OK. Importing a program Perform the following steps to import a program, 1 On the Project Window, select the program location to add. The program can be added to Scan Program or Task Item. 2 Click Project > Import Item from File > Program. The Open dialog box displays. 3 Select the file and then click OK. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 77 January 2011 Honeywell

78 4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project item Project properties Perform the following steps to view the project properties, 1 On the Project Window, select the Project item. 2 Click View > Properties. The item window displays. The following table provides a brief description about the fields. Field Label Project name Project description File name Description Displays the project name, which can be changed as necessary. Displays the project description, which can be changed as necessary. Displays the file name where the project is saved. To save as a different file: click Project > Save As. 3 After the change, click OK. 78 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

79 4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project item Viewing/editing changing PLC properties Perform the following steps to view the properties of a PLC. 1 On the Project Window, select the PLC item. 2 Click View > Properties. The PLC window displays. 3 Make the required changes and click OK. Viewing/editing task properties Perform the following steps to view task properties. 1 On the Project Window, select a task item. 2 Click View > Properties. The Task window displays. 3 Make the required changes and click OK. Viewing/editing program information Perform the following steps to view Program properties. 1 On the Project Window, select a program item. 2 Click View > Properties. The Program window displays. 3 Make the required changes and click OK. Changing program execution sequence Scan and Task program is executed from the priority in regular sequence. Thus, the program location is changed to alter the execution sequence. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 79 January 2011 Honeywell

80 4. Project Configuration 4.3. Project item Changing the order of execution Perform the following steps to change the order of execution. 1 Select a program. 2 Right-click on the selected program and select Move Up (Program) or Move Down (Program) from the context menu. Comparing projects Two projects can be compared with respect to specific items. The Result window displays the compared results. Perform the following steps to compare two projects. 1 Click Project > Compare Projects. The Compare Projects window displays. 2 In the Compare Projects window, click Open Project. 3 Select the project file to compare. 4 Select the items to compare with. The selected items of both projects should be identical. 5 Click Compare. The Result window displays the compared results. 80 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

81 4. Project Configuration 4.4. Project password 4.4 Project password Setting project password You can specify the password for a project file. This function prevents other users from opening the project file. This project file password bears no relation with the PLC password. Password can have a maximum of 8 characters. ATTENTION You will not be able to open the project file if you forget the password. Perform the following steps to set a password for a project. 1 On the Project Window, select the Project. 2 Click View > Properties. The Project window displays. 3 In the Project window, select the Password tab. 4 Enter the password in the Password field in the New password section. 5 Re-enter the password in Confirm password field. 6 Click OK. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 81 January 2011 Honeywell

82 4. Project Configuration 4.4. Project password Changing password Perform the following steps to change password. 1 On the Project Window, select the Project. 2 Click View > Properties. The Project window displays. 3 In the Project window, select the Password tab. 4 Enter the previous password in Password field in the Previous password section. 5 Enter the new password in Password field in the New password section. 6 Re-enter the password in Confirm password field. 7 Click OK. Deleting password Perform the following steps to delete password. 1 On the Project Window, select the Project. 2 Click View > Properties. The Project window displays. 3 In the Project window, select the Password tab. 4 Enter the password in Password field. 5 Click Delete button to delete the password. 82 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

83 5.1 Overview of variables 5. Variables Use of variables is program dependent. In general, global variable is available in every program. To use a global variable as a local variable, it is necessary to declare it as EXTERN before use. Local variable is available only in a designated program. Direct variable (variables with user specified address) can be used in the program. In addition, a comment can be entered to the direct variable. 5.2 Global/direct variable Global/direct variables consist of global variables, direct variable comments, and flags. A global variable declares the variable to be used for a program or displays a list of the declared variables, based on the available variables. Direct variable comment declares the direct variable comment available in a program or displays the comment. The flag displays a list of flags provided by the declaration. The following are the different types of flags: System flag High-speed link flag P2P flag PID flag. Global variable Global variables are declared and the list displays as in the following figure. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 83 January 2011 Honeywell

84 5. Variables 5.2. Global/direct variable Direct variable comments It displays the comment of a direct variable entered or declared for the variables. Flag a) Direct variable: if entering a variable, it displays the data of the direct variable comment. TIP Direct variable varies depending on CPU type. 84 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

85 5. Variables 5.2. Global/direct variable The following table provides a description of the Flag window. Field Label Flag kind All Parameter number Description You can select the type of flag (System, HS link, P2P and PID). Used to display the entire list of flags selected from Flag kind. In case of system flag, all the details are displayed on the window. If All is not selected, only the flag applicable to the Parameter number and Block index displays. This is active only for High-speed link, P2P and PID flag. Only the flag item of the input parameter number displays. (For example, if parameter number 1 is entered; the flag number displays as shown in the following figure.) Block index This is active only for high-speed link and P2P flag. Only the flag item of the input block index displays. (For example, if block index 120 is entered; it is as shown in the following figure.) R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 85 January 2011 Honeywell

86 5. Variables 5.3. Global/direct variable edit 5.3 Global/direct variable edit You can edit the variable kind, variable name, memory address, initial value, retain, used status, and comment of a variable currently declared as a global/direct variable. In addition, a new global variable can be added to the list of the global/direct variables. Global/direct variable registration Register the global/direct variables to use it in a program. In order to register the list of global/direct variables, refer to section Register as global variable. Register as global variable A variable can be added to the list of global variables, modified or deleted from it. Field Label Variable kind Variable name Type Description VAR_GLOBAL and VAR_GLOBAL_CONSTANT are available. The declared variable cannot be duplicated. A number is not allowed as the first character. A special character is not allowed. (However, _ is available.) Space is not allowed as a character. A direct variable with the same name is not allowed (that is, MX0, WB0) If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering a variable. 23 types of variables are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types. Basic type(20): BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, 86 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

87 5. Variables 5.3. Global/direct variable edit Field Label Description SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING Derived type(3): ARRAY (that is, ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => limit (up to third), STRUCT(that is, STRUCT name display) => STRUCT type is not available in STRUCT, FB_INST(that is, FB name display) Memory address Initial value Retain Indicates the memory address that can be entered using the direct variable (I, Q, M, R, W). Indicates the default value that can be set. Indicates if memory address is set, retain column is inactive. R, W: Always retain area. M: Setting as per basic parameter information. I, Q: Always not retain area. Used Comment Line validity Indicates whether to use a declared variable. Allows entry of a comment. Use Ctrl + Enter key to enter multi line comments. To register on global variable window, it needs variable kind, variable name, and variable type. An incomplete entry in a global variable window is highlighted in pink. TIP An error that occurs when editing a cell is highlighted in pink. Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 87 January 2011 Honeywell

88 5. Variables 5.3. Global/direct variable edit Registering special/communication module variables The registering special module variables function is used to register variables of the respective module by referring to the special module information specified in I/O parameter. The variable and the comment can be modified. Perform the following steps to register special/communication module variables: 1 Set the special module on the slot in I/O parameter. 2 Select Global Variables/Address in the project window. 3 Select Global Variable tab in the Global Variable/Address window. 4 Click Edit > Register Special/Communication Module Variables. TIP Registering Special Module Variables removes existing registered entries and re-registers with the newly specified I/O parameters. Copy, cut, delete, and paste Copy, cut, delete or paste can be executed to edit the list of global/direct variables used in the program. Copy Copy is used to save the data of a selected area in the clipboard. The copied details can be pasted to the current project or other projects. You can also paste in other applications. Perform the following steps to copy the data to the windows clipboard. 88 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

89 5. Variables 5.3. Global/direct variable edit 1 Select the area to copy. 2 Click Edit > Copy. TIP To select the area, Use the mouse to select the cell of (0,0) in order to select the whole table Click Edit > Select All in order to select the whole table. Use the mouse to select the column header of the cell in order to select the whole columns. Use the mouse to select the row header of the cell in order to select the whole rows. Use the mouse to drag the part of the cell in order to select the area. Use Shift + Arrow keys on the keyboard in order to select the area Delete Delete is used to delete the data of a selected area from the list of global/direct variables. Perform the following steps to delete data of a selected area. 1 Select the area to delete. 2 Click Edit > Delete. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 89 January 2011 Honeywell

90 5. Variables 5.3. Global/direct variable edit Cut Cut is used to save the selected data in the clipboard in order to add to the current project or other projects. Unlike Copy, Cut deletes the selected data from the original area. Perform the following steps to cut the data and save it in windows clipboard. 1 Select the area to cut. 2 Click Edit > Cut. Paste Paste option enables the pasting of cut or copied data (saved on the clipboard) in the selected position. If the data is already copied, a dialog box displays to select and change the data. If the data saved in the clipboard is a part of columns, To paste the data to a specified location: 1 Select the position to paste on. 2 Click Edit > Paste. 3 If the variable and direct variable are identical on the list of variables/comments, the following dialog box displays. 90 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

91 5. Variables 5.3. Global/direct variable edit a) Number: used to display the duplicated number of the variables and direct variables to paste. b) Replace: used to apply paste. c) Gray Line: used to display the existing list of variables/comments, which is not edited. d) White Line: used to display the list of variables/comments obtained from the clipboard, which is not edited. e) OK: applies the lines selected. The existing list of variables/comments is deleted to add a new list of variables/comments. f) Cancel: The existing list of variables/comments is not deleted, and a new the list of variables/comments is not applied accordingly. g) Select All: used to select all in the Replace column. h) Unselect All: used to cancel all the selections in the Replace column. If the data saved in the clipboard is of the partial column. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 91 January 2011 Honeywell

92 5. Variables 5.3. Global/direct variable edit To paste the data to a specified location: 1 Select the position to paste. 2 Click Edit >Paste. 3 If the variable and direct variable are identical on the list of variables/comments, the following dialog box displays. a) Number: Used to display the duplicated number of the variables and direct variables to paste. b) Replace: Used to apply paste. c) Gray Line: Used to display the data in the existing cell, which is not edited. d) White Line: If the variable or address of the data to paste is duplicated, it is automatically increased and then displayed on the window. In addition, the cell can be edited. e) Select All: Used to select all in the Replace column. f) Unselect All: Used to cancel all the selections in the Replace column. 92 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

93 5. Variables 5.3. Global/direct variable edit TIP If all items are identical, the cell cannot be edited, while if partially identical, the cell can be edited. If the number of the columns saved in the clipboard is greater than the number of the columns to paste, it is not possible to paste. If the data saved in the clipboard is greater than the number of the lines to paste, it is not possible to paste. Paste in View Direct Variable Comment regards the data saved in the clipboard as partial columns. Paste is not available in Flag but in other Excel program. Changing variable name Perform the following steps to change the variable name. 1 On the Project Window, double-click Global Variables/Address. The list of all global variables is listed. 2 Click the header of the Serial Number column to select the entire list of variables. 3 Click Edit > Cut or right-click and choose Cut from the menu. 4 Paste the variables into an Excel sheet. 5 Make necessary changes to the variable names. 6 Right click on the header of the Serial Number column and choose Paste. ATTENTION Do not re-register the special modules. Insert line Insert line is used to insert new lines in the selected area. Inserting a line pushes down the existing lines. Perform the following steps to insert new lines. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 93 January 2011 Honeywell

94 5. Variables 5.3. Global/direct variable edit 1 Select a line before which you want to insert a line. 2 Click Edit > Insert Line. A line is inserted above the selected line. TIP If no cell is selected, one line is added to the first line. Press Enter or Tab to create a new line at the end of the last line. It is available only in the Global Variable window. Delete line Delete line is used to delete the lines in a selected area. Perform the following steps to delete existing lines. 1 Select a line. 2 Click Edit > Delete Line. The line is deleted ATTENTION Delete Line is not executed If no cell is selected. Drag and drop Drag and drop is used to drag selected items and paste in a different position. Perform the following steps to drag and drop the selected items. 1 Select the area to drag and drop. 2 The mouse cursor changes to the state available for drag and drop. 3 Keep the left mouse button pressed and drag and drop the selected items in a position to paste it. Drag and drop is available on the Variable Monitoring Window, LD Window, Data Traces window, Global Variable window of other SoftMaster programs and Direct Variable Comment window of other SoftMaster programs. 94 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

95 5. Variables 5.3. Global/direct variable edit Copy is available when drag and drop is executed in the Excel program. ATTENTION Data does not move but is copied when dragged and dropped Paste is not available in Flag. Export to file Export to file is used to save the previously declared list of global variables in a file that can be subsequently opened and read from external programs. To export a file, click Edit > Export to File. ATTENTION This function is available only for Global Variables. Preview Preview option is used to view the preview of the screen to be printed. Perform the following steps to see the print preview. 1 Click Project > Preview on the window for which you want to preview. 2 A preview of the screen to be printed displays. TIP The size of the columns can be changed to improve readability. In View Address, all areas of the specified variable type displays on the Direct Variable Comment window. In Global Variable, incomplete variables displayed on the current window are also displayed on the Preview window. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 95 January 2011 Honeywell

96 5. Variables 5.3. Global/direct variable edit Print Print option is used to print the screen displayed on Global Variable, Direct Variable Comment, and Flag windows. Perform the following steps to print the data. 1 Click Project > Print from the window to print. 2 The screen is printed at the configured printer. TIP By changing the size of the column, the details to be printed on paper can be adjusted. In Global Variable, incomplete variables displayed on the current screen are also printed. Other functions Sort Double-click the column header to sort the column data in the descending/ ascending sequence. Current order of data is indicated by the direction of the arrow. ATTENTION It is available only in Global Variable and Flag. If the Flag mode changes to Global Variable, variables is aligned to display. View Screen Zoom-In: Displays a magnified view of the screen. Click View > Zoom- In. Screen Zoom-Out: Displays a shrunk/reduced view of the screen. Click View > Zoom-Out. 96 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

97 5. Variables 5.4. Local variable Use Combo Box for screen Zoom-In/Zoom-Out. Select the magnification rate in combo box of the toolbar. Width Automatic Adjust: Adjusts the column size applicably to the String length of the cell. Click View > Resize Width. Height Automatic Adjust: Adjusts the line height applicably to the String height of the cell. Click View > Resize Height. 5.4 Local variable Local variable declares the variables used in a program or displays the list of declared variables. Local variable registration Local variables are automatically registered when all the attributes are filled. Editing a local variable On the list of the currently declared local variables, variable kind, variable name, type, memory address, initial value, retain, used or not used, and comment can be edited. In addition, it adds the local variables used in the program to the list of local variables. A variable can be added, modified, or deleted to/from the list of local variables. a) Variable kind: VAR, VAR_CONSTANT, and VAR_EXTERNAL, VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT are available. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 97 January 2011 Honeywell

98 5. Variables 5.4. Local variable If variable type is CONSTANT, it sets the initial value as the default (0). If the variable type is VAR_EXTERNAL or VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT, the columns of the initial value and retain value are displayed as defaults. b) Variable name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated within the Local variable. The first character cannot be a number. Special characters are not allowed with the exception of _. Space is not allowed as a character. The name cannot be identical to the name of a direct variable (that is, MB4, W4, RW9 ) If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering a variable. c) Type: 23 types are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types. Basic types(20): Derived types(3): BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING ARRAY (that is, ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit (up to third), STRUCT(that is, STRUCT name display) => STRUCT type is no available in STRCT, FB_INST(that is, FB name display) d) Memory address: enter it by using direct variable (I, Q, M, R, and W). e) Initial value: default value can be set. f) Retain: if memory allocation is set, retain column is inactive. R, W: Always retain area. M: Check it by obtaining basic parameter information. I, Q: Always not retain area. g) Used: display whether to use a declared variable. h) Comment: all characters are available. 98 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

99 5. Variables 5.4. Local variable Multi-line entry is available by using Ctrl + Enter key. i) Line validity: To register on global variable window, it needs variable kind/variable name and type. A local variable not registered as a global variable, is highlighted in pink. ATTENTION An error that occurs when editing a cell is highlighted in pink. Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit. Add EXTERNAL variable The list created by the Global Variable can be loaded using the Add External Variable function. To add external variables: Click Edit > Add EXTERNAL Variable. The ADD External Variable window displays. Export to file An Export variable to file is used to save the previously declared list of global variables on the file and to open and read in the external programs. To export a file: Click Edit > Export Variables to File. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 99 January 2011 Honeywell

100 5. Variables 5.5. Function block variable 5.5 Function block variable FB variable Function block (FB) variables are a part of user-defined function blocks. FB variable stores operation results in a command such as timer and counter. You can go to userdefined function blocks in the project tree to add a function block. You can either declare the variable or view the list of declared FB variables. FB variable edit You can edit the variable kind, variable name, type, trigger, memory address, initial value, retain, used or not used, and comment of the already declared FB variables in the list. In addition, a new FB variable can be added to the list of the FB variables. FB variable registration FB variables, like the global variables and local variables must be registered before they are used in a program. A variable can be added to the list of FB variables, modified or deleted from it. a) Variable kind: VAR, VAR_CONSTANT, VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, VAR_IN_OUT, VAR_EXTERNAL, and VAR_EXTERNAL_CONSTANT are available. If a variable type is CONSTANT, the initial value is set as the default. 100 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

101 5. Variables 5.5. Function block variable VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, and VAR_IN_OUT cannot set the initial value. b) Variable name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated with the identical name. The first character cannot be a number. Special characters are not available, with the exception of _. Space is not available as a character. A direct variable with the same name is not available (that is, MB4, W4, RW9) If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering a variable. c) Type: 23 types are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types. Basic type(20): Derived type(3): BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING ARRAY(that is, ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit (up to third), STRUCT(that is, STRUCT name display) => STRUCT type is not available in STRUCT(that is FB name display) d) Trigger: it is VAR_INPUT or VAR_IN_OUT and active only in BOOL type; it can set R and F status. e) Memory address: it cannot be declared as Read Only. f) Initial Value: it can be set. Initial value cannot be set if the variable type is VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT or VAR_IN_OUT. g) Retain: it cannot be declared as Read Only. h) Used: it cannot be declared as Read Only. i) Comment: every character is available. Multi-line entry is available by using Ctrl + Enter key. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 101 January 2011 Honeywell

102 5. Variables 5.5. Function block variable j) Line validity: To register on global variable window, it needs variable type, variable and type. An FB variable not registered as a global variable is displayed in pink. ATTENTION An error that occurs when editing a cell is displayed in pink. Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit. 102 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

103 5. Variables 5.6. FUNCTION variable 5.6 FUNCTION variable FUN variable Function (FUN) variables are a part of user-defined functions. FUN Variables do not store the operation results. You can go to user-defined function blocks in the project tree to add a function. FUN variable either declares the variable or displays the list of declared FUN variables. FUN variable edit On the list of the currently declared FUN variables, variable kind, variable name, type, trigger, memory address, initial value, retain, used and comment items can be edited. In addition, a new FUN variable can be added to the list of the FUN variables. FUN variable registration The FUN variables must be registered before they are used in a program. A variable can be added to the list of FUN variables, modified or deleted from it. a) Variable Kind: VAR, VAR_INPUT, VAR_OUTPUT, VAR_IN_OUT, and VAR_RETURN are available. b) Variable name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated with the identical name. The first character cannot be a number. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 103 January 2011 Honeywell

104 5. Variables 5.6. FUNCTION variable Special characters with the exception of _ are not available. Space is not available as a character. The name of the FUN variable must not be same as that of a direct variable. If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering a variable. c) Type: 22 types are available; 20 basic types and 3 derived types. Basic types(20): Derived types(2): BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING ARRAY(that is ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit (up to third), STRUCT(that is STRUCT name display) => STRUCT type is no available in STRCT d) Used: it cannot be declared as Read Only. e) Comment: every character is available. Multi-line entry is available by using Ctrl + Enter key. f) Line validity: To register on FB variable window, it needs variable type, variable and type. g) - If not registered on FB variable, it displays in pink. TIP If any error occurs when editing a cell, it is displayed in pink. Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit. 104 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

105 5. Variables 5.7. Editing variables 5.7 Editing variables You can edit the variable, type, memory allocation, initial value, retain, and comment from the list of the already declared data types. In addition, it adds the data type used in the program to the list of data types. Variable registration A variable must be registered before it is used in a program. A variable can be added to, modified, or deleted from the list of variables. a) Variable Name: The declared variable cannot be duplicated with the identical name. The first character cannot be a number. Special characters with the exception of _ are not available. Space is not available as a character. A name same with direct variable cannot be used as a name. If a line is empty, BOOL is displayed as the default type when entering a variable. b) Type: 21 types are available; 20 basic types and 1 derived types R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 105 January 2011 Honeywell

106 5. Variables 5.7. Editing variables Basic types (20): Derived types(1): BOOL, BYTE, WORD, DWORD, LWORD, SINT, INT, DINT, LINT, USINT, UINT, UDINT, ULINT, REAL, LREAL, TIME, DATE, TIME_OF_DAY, DATE_AND_TIME, STRING ARRAY(that is, ARRAY[0..6,0..2,0..4] OF BOOL) => factor limit (up to third) c) Memory address: Read Only. d) Initial Value: Read Only. e) Retain: Read Only. f) Comment: Every character is available. Multi-line entry is available by using Ctrl + Enter key. TIP If any error occurs when editing a cell, it is displayed in pink. Press ESC key to recover the previous value during the cell edit. 106 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

107 5. Variables 5.8. User-defined function/function block 5.8 User-defined function/function block A user can personally create and use a function/function block, which is not provided by SoftMaster. The user-defined function/function block can be created as follows. Create the user-defined function/function block program Create the user-defined function/function block I/O variable User-defined function/function block programming Compile(register) the user-defined function/function block Use it in a scan program R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 107 January 2011 Honeywell

108 5. Variables 5.8. User-defined function/function block Creating user-defined function/function block program In order to create a user-defined function/function block, select Project > Add Item Function or Project > Add Item > Function Block. a) Program Name: You can enter a user-defined function/function block. When the user-defined function/function is registered, the input name is registered. b) Language: You can select a programming language for the user-defined function/function block. A user-defined function is created only by the LD language while a user-defined function block can be created by either the LD or SFC language. c) Use EN/ENO: You can select whether to use or not use EN/ENO, which is used under the operation condition of function/function block. If you do not select EN/ENO, a user should declare BOOL type variable in the first input and first output parameters of the function/function block. d) Return Data Type: Designates the type of the results after a user-defined function is executed. It is activated only when a user-defined function is created. 108 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

109 5. Variables 5.8. User-defined function/function block e) Program description: Used to enter the comment of a user-defined function/function block. If unnecessary, the comment does not have to be entered. f) OK: Saves the entry in the dialog box and closes the dialog box. g) Cancel: Cancels the entry in the dialog box and closes the dialog box. ATTENTION Click OK creates a new item with the name entered in the item of userdefined function/function block. Creating user-defined function/function block I/O variable Perform the following steps to create user-defined function/function Block I/O variable. 1 If you double-click a local variable among the items created with the name of user-defined function/function block, the following local variable window is created. 2 Add input variable, I/O variable, and output value in the local variable window. Depending on the added I/O variables, the function/function block type is automatically changed in the lower-half of the local variable window. a) VAR_RETURN: A type of variable recurrenting the value of user-defined function. It is automatically created as a variable with the same name of the R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 109 January 2011 Honeywell

110 5. Variables 5.8. User-defined function/function block user-defined function with return type designated when creating a user-defined function. b) Function type: used to automatically display input variable, I/O variable, function/function block type by output variable in the local variable window. The type is as same as when using the user-defined function/function block in the scan program. ATTENTION There should be at least one or more input and output variables with a maximum limit of 32. User-defined function/function block programming Perform the following steps for user-defined function/function block programming. 1 If you double-click a program among the items created with the newly entered name in the user-defined function/function block, a program window with the previously designated language appears. The following window shows the screen created when selecting the LD. 2 Create a program, based on the variable input in the local variable window. ATTENTION If local variable edit and program edit are finished, select function/function block toolbar instruction to check whether the edited user-defined function/function block is registered. 110 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

111 5. Variables 5.8. User-defined function/function block Using user-defined function/function blocks Perform the following steps to use user-defined Function/Function Block. 1 Open the program to use a user-defined Function/Function Block and to move the cursor to the position to input. 2 Click Function/Function Block Toolbar. 3 Select a user-defined Function/Function Block in the Function/Function Block dialog box. 4 Enter the variable to be used in the input/output of function/function block. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 111 January 2011 Honeywell

112 5. Variables 5.8. User-defined function/function block 112 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

113 6.1 Overview 6. LD Edit LD program displays the PLC program through graphic signals of coils or contact points used in the relay logic diagram. 6.2 Limits There are functional limits in LD Program Edit as described in the following table. Item Description Limit Maximum contact points Maximum lines Maximum copy lines Maximum paste lines Maximum contact points available to add in a line Maximum lines available to edit Maximum copy lines available to copy at a time Maximum paste lines to paste at a time Up to 31 Up to Up to 300 Up to 300 R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 113 January 2011 Honeywell

114 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit 6.3 Program edit Edit tools The input of LD edit items are enabled after you select the input symbols from the LD tool box and if you click on the specific position or if you press applicable shortcut key. Symbol Shortcut key Description Esc F3 F4 Shift + F1 Shift + F2 F5 F6 Shift + F8 Shift + F9 F9 F11 Shift + F3 Shift + F4 Changes to selection mode Normally open contact point Normally closed contact point Positive transition pulse contact point Negative transition pulse contact point Horizontal line Vertical line Connection line Reverse input Coil Reverse coil Set(latch) coil Reset(unlatch) coil 114 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

115 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit Symbol Shortcut key Description Shift + F5 Shift + F6 F10 Shift + F7 Ctrl+3 Ctrl+4 Ctrl+5 Ctrl+6 Positive transition sensing coil Negative transition sensing coil Function/function block Extended function Normally open OR contact point Normally closed OR contact point Positive-conversion detection OR contact point Negative-conversion detection OR contact point The following are the shortcut keys related to the movement of the cursor. Applicable shortcut keys can be customized by users of SoftMaster. Shortcut Key Home Ctrl+Home Back space End Ctrl + End Description Moves to the beginning of the column. Moves to the beginning of the program. Deletes the current data and moves to the left. Moves the current cursor to the right by a blank. Moves the current cursor to the left by a blank. Moves the current cursor upward by a blank. Moves the current cursor downward by a blank. Moves to the end of the column/row. Moves to the last line edited. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 115 January 2011 Honeywell

116 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit TIP Among shortcut keys in edit toolbox, s stands for Shift key, c for Ctrl key. For example, Positive transition pulse contact point: Shift + F1 s + F1 sf1. The shortcut keys described in edit tool are based on the shortcut keys basically provided in SoftMaster. For setting details on the user-defined shortcut keys, Refer to Shortcut keys. Input contact point This is used for adding contact points (normally open contact, normally closed contact, positive transition pulse contact, and negative transition pulse contact). Perform the following steps to add a contact point: 1 Move the cursor to the location to insert the contact point. 2 On the tool box, select the type of the contact to insert and click the edit area or click shortcut key applicable to the contact to insert. 3 After the address name is inserted in the Variable Input dialog box, click OK. 116 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

117 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit TIP Click Tool > Options. Select Common Editor under options. If the input mode is promptly released from the edit page, the Variable Input dialog box is not automatically displayed when inserting a contact point and coil. Input OR contact point The basic operation of Enter key is to enter identical instructions used in previous edit. For example, if a normally open contact is entered in the previous edit, the normally open contact input dialog box displays when the enter key is pressed again. Input OR contact points are normally open OR contact point, normally closed OR contact point, positive-conversion detection OR contact point, negative-conversion detection OR contact point. To add an OR contact point, perform the following steps. 1 Move the cursor to the location to insert the OR contact point. 2 On the tool box, select the type of the contact to insert and click the edit area or click the shortcut key applicable to the OR contact point to insert. 3 After the address name is inserted in the Variable Input dialog box, click OK. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 117 January 2011 Honeywell

118 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit ATTENTION In duplicated mode, in case contact point is in cursor, OR connection does not operate. In application instruction, vertical line is not inserted. Entering variable/address It is used to enter the Address or Variable/Comment. 118 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

119 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit Field Label Variable Name Local variable Address Comment Flag List All Parameter number Block Index Global variable New Variable Edit Variable Delete Variable OK Cancel Description It is the variable or declared variable name. If the input string is of variable format and the applicable string is not registered as a variable in the Variable/Comment, the Variable/Comment Add dialog box displays. Displays the list of declared local variables. Displays the address. Displays the list of flags. Detailed flag type can be selected on the flag item. Displays the list of flags for selection. You can select among System/High-speed link/p2p/pid Flags. Select this option to display all the flags for the item. Clear this option to display the flags applicable to the input parameter number/block index. Enter and set the number for each selected flag item. 0~12 is available for HS link, 0~8 for P2P, and 0~63 for PID. Enter the block number for each selected flag item. 0~127 is available for High-speed link and 0~63 for P2P. Click to display the list of global variables. It can be registered as an EXTERNAL variable. Click to add a variable to the list of local variables. Click to edit a selected variable. Click to delete a selected variable from the list of local variables. Click to save changes and close the dialog box. Click to close the dialog box. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 119 January 2011 Honeywell

120 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit Add/edit variable name It is used to Add or edit a variable. Field Label Variable Name Data Type Variable Kind Address Initial value Trigger Retain Description Description Enter the name of the variable to be added. Select a data type for the variable. Select a variable type. Allocate a direct address for the variable. Enter the initial value for the variable. Select the trigger state for the variable. Select to retain the current state of the variable. Enter a description for the variable. TIP If the variable name is entered on the Variable/Address dialog box, it is automatically completed based on the currently displayed Variable/Comment list. 120 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

121 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit Inserting lines Insert a horizontal line for horizontal connection between LD edit factors, and a vertical line for vertical connections. Inserting a horizontal line Perform the following steps to insert a horizontal line. 1 Move the cursor to the location to connect. 2 Select the shortcut key of Horizontal Line Input or select Horizontal Line on the tool box and select the edit area to insert the Horizontal Line. Inserting a vertical line Perform the following steps to add a vertical line. 1 Move the cursor to the location to connect. 2 Select the shortcut key of Vertical Line Input or select Vertical Line on the tool box and select the edit area to insert the Vertical Line. TIP The vertical line is inserted to the left of the current location of the cursor. Inserting coil It is used to insert coils, that is, coil, reverse coil, positive transition pulse coil, and negative transition pulse coil. Perform the following steps to insert reverse coil/positive transition pulse coil/negative transition pulse coil. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 121 January 2011 Honeywell

122 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit 1 Move the cursor to the location where the coil is to be inserted. 2 On the tool box, select the type of coil to insert and then click the edit area or click the shortcut key applicable to the coil to insert it. 3 After a variable name is entered on the Variable Selection dialog box, click OK. TIP If a coil and output related application instruction is entered, a horizontal line is automatically inserted to connect with the left item. In case there is a duplicate coil, output to output module, according to the status of last coil. Inserting a function block It is used to enter a function (block) for operation. Perform the following steps to enter a function (block). 1 Move the cursor to the location where the function (block) is to be entered. 2 On the tool box, select the function (block) to enter and then click the edit area or click the shortcut key applicable to the function (block) input. Select a function/function block. 122 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

123 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit a) Name: Select the function (block) to use. b) Search: Used to search for the name of a function(block) c) List: Select function, function block or function/function block to display the appropriate information. d) Category: Select a category for the function (block). e) Function list: Displays the list of function (block) of a selected category. f) Function information: Displays the information and properties of a function. In case of function, a user can set the properties of an input parameter; in case of function block, a user can select the name and class of an instance. g) OK: Click to apply the details and close the dialog box. h) Cancel: Click to close the dialog box. 3 On the Function (block) Input dialog box, enter the function (block), and then R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 123 January 2011 Honeywell

124 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit click OK. REFERENCE - INTERNAL For additional information on the function (block), refer to the 2MLI CPU User s Guide. Favorite function block It displays a function block that is mostly used in the current project or recently used. You can also register a function to frequently use in the future. Viewing function block Perform the following steps to display a function block: 1 Click View > Instruction Window. 2 Viewing Function block. A function block is automatically registered when it is used in a LD program. The function block is listed on the beginning of the list. If a function is already added to the list, the item (function) displays in the beginning. 124 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

125 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit 4 If the current list selection is Most Recently Used, the function is determined by the frequency of function block used. TIP A function block is automatically registered if the function block is selected on the function block dialog box. A function copied or pasted does not affect the frequency and the recent use. Viewing favorite function It enables you to register a function block for frequent use in projects. Perform the following steps to register a function block. 1 Select a Favorite Function in the selection box. 2 Click Edit to view the list of Functions. The Favorite Function Setting window displays. The field description for Favorite Function Setting window are as follows: Favorite Function: Displays the currently selected function. The content displayed on the Favorite Function List is the content to be displayed in the Command window. Function List: Displays the list of function blocks available for the current project. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 125 January 2011 Honeywell

126 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit Add: Select a function and click Add to add the selected function to the Favorite Function list. Remove: Click to delete a selected function from the Favorite Function. Up: Click to move a selected item to a higher level of the favorite function. Down: Click to move a selected item to a lower level of the favorite function. Clear All: Click to clear the current favorite function list. OK: Click to check and save changes. It also closes the dialog box. Cancel: Click to close the dialog box. Use function It is used to use the function block on the list. Perform the following steps to use the function block. 1 Move the cursor to the position to insert a function. 2 Double-click a command to insert in the Command Window. 126 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

127 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit TIP It is also possible to drag an item to insert in the Command Window and insert it to the LD program. Entering comments It is used to insert the Rung and Output Comment. The comment displayed at the start of Rung is called Rung Comment, and the comment for the output factor is called Output Comment. Adding rung comment Perform the following steps to enter a rung comment: 1 Move the cursor to the location to enter the rung comment. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 127 January 2011 Honeywell

128 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit 2 Click Edit > Comment/Label Input. Enter the Comment and Label. a) Comment: Selected to enter the Rung Comment. b) Label: Selected to enter the label. c) OK: Click to apply the selected details and to close the dialog box. d) Cancel: Click to close the dialog box. 3 If the Rung Comment dialog box displays, enter the comment and click OK. Enter or edit the Rung Comment or the Output Comment. a) Comment: Enter the details of the rung comment or the output comment. b) OK: Click to apply the input details and to close the dialog box. c) Cancel: Click to close the dialog box. 128 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

129 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit Output comment Perform the following steps to enter the output comment. 1 Move the cursor to the location to enter the output comment. 2 Double-click or press Enter key. 3 Enter the output comment on the Output Comment dialog box and click OK. TIP You can enter an output comment only when an output is available. Input label It is used to enter the label to refer to from the extended function of JMP. Perform the following steps to enter a label on a function. 1 Move the cursor to the location to enter the label. 2 Click Edit > Insert Comment/Label. The Comment/Label dialog box displays. 3 Select Label and press Enter or click OK. The Label List window displays. 4 In the Label List window, enter the label to add and click OK. The field description for Label List window are as follows: a) Label: Enter the name of the label. b) Label in: Displays the label currently in use in the same scan program. Selecting an item on the Label in use, the selected item is entered. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 129 January 2011 Honeywell

130 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit TIP A maximum of 16 English characters can be used for the label name. The first character of the label cannot be an integer or a special character. Label Input rules are similar to the Variable/Comment Input rules. Insert extension function It is used to insert the extension function such as insert/call subroutine and program end. Perform the following steps to insert an extension function. 1 Move the cursor to the position to insert an extension function. 2 Click Edit > Tools > Extension Function. The Extension Function window displays. 3 Select an extension function to insert and click OK. The field description for Label List window are as follows: a) Extension: Shows an extended function or displays the inserted extended function. b) Command List: Displays the available extended function. c) OK: Click to apply a selected item and to close the dialog box. d) Cancel: Click to close the dialog box. TIP Extension functions, SBRT, and RET cannot be inserted at LD used in SFC and Transition. 130 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

131 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit Insert cell It is used to insert a new cell at the current cursor position. Perform the following steps to insert a new cell. 1 Move the cursor to the location to insert the cell. 2 Click Edit > Insert Cell. TIP If inserting a cell in Function Block, a variable is also moved together. Insert line It is used to insert a new line at the current cursor position. Perform the following steps to insert a line. 1 Move the cursor to the location to insert the line in. 2 Click Edit > Insert Line. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 131 January 2011 Honeywell

132 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit TIP a) If you Insert Line, a new line is inserted in the current cursor position. b) If you select an area for Line Insert, new lines equal to the lines in the selected area are inserted. c) If the function block is contained, the line cannot be inserted. Delete item It is used to delete the input contact point, coil, function block, line, rung/output comment, and label. Perform the following steps to delete an item. 1 Move the cursor to the location to delete the item. 2 Click Edit > Delete. Delete cell It is used to delete factors such as the input contact point and horizontal line to draw in the next cell. Perform the following steps to delete cell (input contact point and horizontal line). 1 Move the cursor to the location to delete the cell from. 2 Click Edit > Delete Cell. 132 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

133 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit TIP Position the cursor on the cell to be deleted and press Delete on the keyboard. Alternately, right-click and select Delete from the context menu. Delete line It is used to delete all the cells in the selected row. Perform the following steps to delete a line. 1 Move the cursor onto the line to delete. 2 Click Edit > Delete Line. Copy/cut/paste It is used to copy data from a selected area, or cut the data to copy at a specific position. Unlike Copy, the Cut function deletes the data from the selected area. Copy and paste Perform the following steps to copy the data to windows clipboard. 1 Select the area to copy. 2 Click Edit > Copy. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 133 January 2011 Honeywell

134 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit 3 Move the cursor to the area to paste. 4 Click Edit > Paste. Cut and paste Perform the following steps to cut and paste selected data. 1 Select the area to cut. 2 Click Edit > Cut. 3 Move the cursor to the area to paste on. 4 Click Edit > Paste. Undo and redo It is used to Undo the details edited by Program Edit back to its previous state, or execute the cancelled action again. 134 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

135 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit Undo (Example of delete) Perform the following steps to undo a particular action. 1 Move the cursor onto the position to delete. 2 Click Edit > Delete. 3 On the menu, select Edit > Undo. Redo (Example of delete) To redo a particular action: Click Edit > Redo. TIP All the edited details can be cancelled or executed again. The number of times to cancel the execution is unlimited. Program edit mode LD Program supports two modes; Insert Mode and Overwrite mode. It is applied when inserting a contact point or function (block). Insert mode: R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 135 January 2011 Honeywell

136 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit Overwrite mode: TIP Use Insert key on the keyboard to toggle between Overwrite and Insert. If inserting a contact point Overwrite mode: If entering a different type of contact point, the only contact point type is changed with the input address or variable remained (it does not work if a same type contact point is selected). Insert mode: Always inserts a new contact point to a designated position, regardless of contact point type. Insertion operation is as same as Insert Cell. If inserting a function (block) Overwrite mode: Inserts a function (block) into the current position. Insert mode: It inserts a space as high as a function (block) if there is no enough space to insert the function. Insert Space is as same as Insert Line. 136 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

137 6. LD Edit 6.3. Program edit R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 137 January 2011 Honeywell

138 6. LD Edit 6.4. Viewing program options 6.4 Viewing program options View IL program It is used to convert the LD program to the IL program and displays with the IL program. Perform the following steps to view an IL program. 1 Select a program. 2 Select View > IL. ATTENTION In case of an incomplete rung in the program, the LD program cannot be converted to an IL program. Edit is not possible in IL View. Program magnification change This is used for changing the magnification of the LD program displayed on the screen. 138 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

139 6. LD Edit 6.4. Viewing program options Zoom-in To Zoom-in, click View > Zoom-In. Zoom-out To Zoom-out, click View > Zoom-Out. TIP Hold the CTRL key on your keyboard and spin the mouse wheel forward to zoom-in. Hold the CTRL key on your keyboard and spin the mouse wheel backward to zoom-out. On the View Tool selection box, the user can select or directly enter the magnification. REFERENCE - INTERNAL For additional information on Tool bars, refer to Tool bar. View address It is used for displaying only the name of the address for the variable or address used as the contact point, coil, and function (block). If there is no address, it displays a name of variable. To view an address: Select View > Addresses. View variables It is used for displaying the name of the variable for the variable or address used as the contact point, coil, and function (block). If no variable is declared for the address, it is displayed as the address name. To view variables: Select View > Variables. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 139 January 2011 Honeywell

140 6. LD Edit 6.4. Viewing program options View address/variables It is used for displaying the name of the address/variable for the variable or address used in the contact point, coil, and function (block). If there is no address in the variable, the variable name is displayed. To view address/variable: Select View > Address/Variables. View address/comment It is used for displaying the address/comment for the variable or address used in the contact point, coil, and function (block). If there is no address in the variable, the variable name is displayed. To view an address/comment: Select View > Address/Comments. TIP If View Options are changed, it may take some time according to the amount of the edited program steps. Print function of the Address/Variable/Comment is available. For the details of print option, refer LD program print. View variables/comments It is used for displaying the variable/comment for the device used as the operand of the contact point, coil, and application instruction. To view a variable/comment: Select View > Variables/Comments. ATTENTION If View Options are changed, it may take some time according to the number of the edited program steps. Print function of the Device/Variable/Comment is available. 140 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

141 6. LD Edit 6.4. Viewing program options Adjust number of contact point It is used to adjust the number of contact points displayed on the screen. Here, the number of contact points is the total number (horizontal cell - 1), excluding the output position. To adjust the number of contact point: Click View > Change Columns > Increase Columns. If the data on the right of the current screen is larger than the number of contact points to display, it may be displayed by rung including arrow. TIP It may increase or decrease one by one in View > Toolbox. The number of contact to set is 9 ~ 32. The number of contact points minimally set in LD program used for SFC action and transition is 5. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 141 January 2011 Honeywell

142 6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional edit function LD view properties It is used to select the viewing options of the LD window. In the window, the options of address, variable and comment view can be set while magnification and the number of contact points can be set simultaneously. Perform the following steps to view LD screen properties. 1 Click View > LD Properties. The LD View Properties window displays. 2 Change the required LD properties and click OK. The field description for LD View Properties window are as follows: Field Label View Option Magnification No. of contacts OK Cancel Apply Default Reset All Windows Description Indicates the view options for variable and address. Indicates the magnification on the window. It is allowed from 40 to 200%. Indicates the number of contact points displayed on the window. Click to apply the settings and to close the dialog box. Click to close the dialog box. Click to apply the settings to the current LD window. Click to set the current settings as the default of LD window. If creating a new LD program, it is displayed in the currently set view mode. Click to restore the current settings to the default. Click to apply current settings to all windows. 142 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

143 6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional edit function TIP In the LD Properties window, Address + Variable + Comment View Options cannot be set. In case of All Windows, the setting is applied to all of SFC program action, transition and user s function (block) created by LD. 6.5 Additional edit function Additional functions for convenient edit are described as follows. Optimize program It is used for deleting the horizontal and empty lines between the contact points, to optimize the position where LD diagram is drawn. Perform the following steps to optimize the program. Click Edit > Optimize Program R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 143 January 2011 Honeywell

144 6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional edit function ATTENTION Optimize program if once executed cannot be reverted to its previous state through execution cancel. It may take some time according to the size of the program. In case LD logic is not complete, optimization function does not operate. Block mask instruction This is used to specify or cancel the area block mask in the PLC among the LD programs. Block mask instruction setting Perform the following steps to edit the block mask instruction settings. 1 Move the cursor to the rung to specify the block mask. 2 Click Edit > Set Block Mask. 144 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

145 6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional edit function Canceling block mask instruction Perform the following steps to remove the block mask instruction. 1 Move the cursor to the rung to cancel the Block Mask instruction. 2 Click Edit > Remove Block Mask. Bookmark It enables the user to easily move to a specific area with the bookmark specified on the line. Set bookmark Perform the following steps to set a bookmark. 1 Move the cursor to a line to specify the bookmark on. 2 Click Edit > Bookmark > Set/Remove. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 145 January 2011 Honeywell

146 6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional edit function Reset bookmark Perform the following steps to reset a bookmark. 1 Move the cursor to the line to cancel the bookmark from. 2 Click Edit > Bookmark > Set/Reset. Reset all bookmarks To reset all bookmarks, click Edit > Bookmark > Remove All. 146 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

147 6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional edit function Previous bookmark To edit the previous bookmark, click Edit > Bookmark > Previous Bookmark. Next bookmark To edit the next bookmark, click Edit > Bookmark > Next Bookmark. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 147 January 2011 Honeywell

148 6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional edit function TIP Bookmark is specified on the line unit. Bookmark is not an item to edit, thus the Set/Reset options are not included in Undo and Redo. Go to Finding specific line It is used to move to the specified line position, or go to the position of the edited label and rung comment. Perform the following steps to find a specific line in the program: 1 Click Find/Replace > Go To > /Line. The Go To Line window displays. The field description for Go To Line window are as follows: Field Label Go to line Program list Description Specifies the line to go to. Displays the list of the current PLC programs. 148 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

149 6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional edit function Go to Cancel Click to close the window and to go to the selected program s line/step. Click to close the window. 2 Select the line to go to and the program from the list. Click Go to for moving the specified line/step. TIP Go To Line is available only in the LD program. This function is not available for the LD used for SFC /Transitions. Finding specific label Perform the following steps to find a specific label. 1 Click Find/Replace > Go To > Label. The Go To Label window displays. The field description for Go To Label window are as follows: Field Label Program Labels list Go To Cancel Description Displays the list of the current PLC programs. If you select All Programs, the list of all the labels displays. Displays the list of the labels used in the selected program. Click to close the window and to go to the selected label. Click to close the window. 2 Select the label and program from the list. Click Go to to move to the specified label. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 149 January 2011 Honeywell

150 6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional edit function TIP Go To Label is available only in the LD Program. This function is not available for the LD used for SFC /Transition. Finding specific rung comment Perform the following steps to find a specific comment in a program. 1 Click Find/Replace > Go To > Rung Comment. The Go to ring comment window displays. The field description for Go to ring comment window are as follows: Field Label Description Program Rung comment list Go to Cancel Displays the list of the current PLC programs. If you select All Programs, the list of all the rung comments displays. Displays the list of the rung comments used in the selected program. Click this to go to the selected rung comment. Click to close the window. 2 Select the program and the rung comment to go to from the list. Click Go to to move to the specified rung comment. TIP Go To Rung Comment is available only in the LD Program. The LD used for SFC /Transition is not available in Go To. Finding END command Perform the following steps to go to the END command. 150 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

151 6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional edit function 1 Click Find/Replace > Go To > END Command. The Go To END Instruction window displays. The field description for Go To END Instruction window are as follows: Field Label Program END instruction list Go to Close Description Displays the list of the current PLC programs. If you select All Programs, the list of all the END instructions is displays. Displays the list of the END instructions used in the selected program. Click to close the window to go to the selected END instruction. Click to close the window. 2 Select the program and the END command to go to from the list. Click Go to to move to the specified END command. TIP Go To END Instruction is available only in the LD Program. The LD used for SFC /Transition is not available in Go To. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 151 January 2011 Honeywell

152 6. LD Edit 6.5. Additional edit function 152 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

153 7.1 Overview 7. SFC Edit SFC is used for controlling the execution sequence of other programs (LD, ST) by using graphic symbols (step, transition, and branch). 7.2 SFC program limitations SFC program has the following limitations when editing a program. Item Description Limit Maximum step number Maximum row number Maximum column number Indicates the maximum number of available steps excluding the step used as step variable in the program. Maximum number of editable rows. Maximum number of editable columns. 512 steps 65,535 rows 65,535 columns R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 153 January 2011 Honeywell

154 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit 7.3 Program edit Edit tools To begin entering the inputs of SFC Edit items, select the input symbols from the LD tool box and click on a specific location or press the associated shortcut key. Symbol Shortcut Key Description Esc Changes to selection mode. - +Transiton or Transition+ - - Block+Transition or Transition+Block - Label - Jump - Left Branch - Right Branch The following shortcut keys are related with the movement of the cursor. Applicable Shortcut Keys can be specified by users in the SoftMaster. Shortcut Key Home Ctrl + Home Description Moves to the start of the column. Moves to the start of the program Deletes the current data and moves to the left. Moves the current cursor to the right by a blank. 154 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

155 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit Shortcut Key Description End Ctrl + End Moves the current cursor to the left by a blank. Moves the current cursor upward by a blank. Moves the current cursor downward by a blank. Moves to the end of the column. ATTENTION Among shortcut keys in Edit Toolbox, s stands for Shift key, c for Ctrl key, a for Alt key. The shortcut keys described in Edit Tool are based on the shortcut keys basically provided in SoftMaster. For more details on the userdefined shortcut keys, refer to Configuring shortcut keys. For each SFC program added to the project program list, atleast 64 words of automatic variables must be declared. Input step/transition This is used to insert a /Transition in a program. Perform the following steps to insert a /Transition. 1 Move the cursor to the location you want edit. 2 Select symbol on the tool box and click the edit area or press shortcut key applicable to symbol. 3 A new /Transition is inserted. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 155 January 2011 Honeywell

156 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit ATTENTION name is allocated automatically; however, you can edit it. According to input location, + Transition or Transition + are inserted. Item of location selected + Transition Transition + Transition, start line of parallel branch, label, selection branch termination line., block, start line of selection branch, parallel branch termination line. Read Only variables cannot be used for /Transition variable. 156 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

157 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit Input action is executed when step is activated. Executes the program connected with action. Perform the following steps to edit the symbol in a program. 1 Move the cursor to the location you want to edit 2 Select symbol on the tool box and click the edit area or press shortcut key applicable to symbol. or ATTENTION s location is different according to selected edit area. Location Right Bottom item s location is the right of step when you select a step. s location is the bottom of action when you select an action. The number of steps connected with one step is not limited. cannot be connected with a block. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 157 January 2011 Honeywell

158 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit Input block/transition Perform the following steps to insert a Block/Transaction. 1 Move the cursor to the block you want edit. 2 Select a block on the tool box and click the edit area or click the shortcut key applicable to symbol. 3 A New block/transition is inserted. ATTENTION Block input location standard is same as step input. Input label Perform the following steps to input a label. 1 Move the cursor to the location you want edit. 2 On the tool box, select the label to enter and then click the edit area or click the shortcut key applicable to symbol. 3 The new label is inserted. 158 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

159 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit ATTENTION Label can be inserted when selecting a step or block. Label is inserted ahead of the selected step or block. Input jump Perform the following steps to insert a jump in a program. 1 Move the cursor to the location you want to edit. 2 On the tool box, select the Jump to insert and then click the edit area or click the shortcut key applicable to symbol. 3 A new jump is inserted. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 159 January 2011 Honeywell

160 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit ATTENTION The jump can be inserted when selecting the last transition within selection branch or transition of program in the last row. The jump is inserted ahead of the selected transition. The jump is available within the same program. Create left branch To create a left branch, perform the following steps. 1 Move the cursor to the location to start branch. 2 On the tool box, select the left branch and click the edit area or press shortcut key. 3 It displays branch start location and branch connection location. Branch start location Branch termination location 4 Move cursor to the branch end location. 5 Select the branch end location. 160 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

161 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit 6 The branch is created. ATTENTION When selecting the branch start location, the selection branch or parallel branch is created according to the branch start location. Item of branch start location Line shape Selection branch, block Horizontal one line Parallel branch Transition Horizontal two line Extending branch Perform the following steps to extend a branch. 1 Move the cursor to the branch to extend. 2 On the tool box, select the left branch and click the edit area or press appropriate shortcut key. 3 A new branch is created. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 161 January 2011 Honeywell

162 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit ATTENTION The maximum number of branches is limited to the number of rows. Create right branch To create a right branch, perform the following steps. 1 Move the cursor to the location to start the branch. 2 On the tool box, select the right branch and click the edit area or press shortcut key. 3 It displays the branch start location and the branch connection location. Branch start location Branch termination location 162 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

163 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit 4 Move the cursor to the branch termination location. 5 Select the branch end location. 6 The branch is created. ATTENTION The procedure to create a parallel branch is same as creating a left branch. Refer to Create left branch. Extending branch Perform the following steps to extend a branch of a location. 1 Move the cursor to the location to extend the branch. 2 On the tool box, select the right branch and click the edit area or press shortcut key. 3 New branch is inserted. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 163 January 2011 Honeywell

164 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit Edit step property You can edit step name, comment, and so on. Perform the following steps to edit property of a location. 1 Move the cursor to the location you want to edit. 2 Press Enter key or double-click. The Properties window displays. The field description for Properties window are as follows: Field Label Name Comment Initial step variable Find OK Cancel Description Enter the name of the step. Enter a comment for the step. Designates it as initial step. Refers to step name from local variable list. To find a variable from the local variable list. Click to save the contents and to close the window. Click to close window without saving. 164 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

165 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit ATTENTION The initial step is execution start step of the program. You can designate only one. When checking the program, it checks the error. When using step variable, you can refer it from other programs. Transition property You can edit the transition s name, comment. Perform the following steps to edit the transition property of a location. 1 Move the cursor to the location you want edit. 2 Press Enter key or double-click. The Transition Properties window displays. The field description for Transition Properties window are as follows: Field Label Description Name Comment Type List Find Less OK Cancel Enter transition s name. Enter the transition s comment. Select transition as variable or program. Displays the other transition used in the current program. You can select variable from local variable list. Hides the list. Click to save the contents and to close the window. Click to close the window. ATTENTION Transition program can be written by LD program. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 165 January 2011 Honeywell

166 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit property You can edit the action s name, comment, and qualifier. Perform the following steps to edit the action property of a location. 1 Move the cursor to the location you want edit. 2 Press Enter key or double-click. The Properties window displays. The field description for Properties window are as follows: Field Label Description Name Comment Type Post scan List Qualifier Time Find Less OK Cancel Enter the name of the action. Enter a comment for the action. Designates action as variable or program. Deactivates the coil in the action after executing the action. Displays the other actions used in the current program. Acts differently according to action qualifier. Enters time according to qualifier. You can select variable from local variable list. Hides the list. Click to save the contents and to close the window. Click to close the window. 166 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

167 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit ATTENTION can operate differently according to the action qualifier. Qualifier Functions characteristic N (Nonstored) R (overriding Reset) S (Set) L (time Limited) is executed when step is activated. When the step is activated, the action whose qualifier is S, SD, DS, and SL stops. If the step is activated, it continues its execution unit, R qualifier is executed. If the step is activated, it continues its execution when the time is being set. activated status step operating R qualifier is executed Setting time D (time Delayed) If the step is activated, the action starts after setting the time. P (Pulse) If the step is activated, it continues its execution during one scan. 1 scan execution SD (Stored & time Delay) If the step is activated, action starts after setting time and it continues its execution unit until R qualifier is executed. If R qualifier is executed before setting time, action is not executed. R R DS (time Delayed & Stored) If step is activated, action starts after setting time and it continues its execution unit until R qualifier is executed. If R qualifier is executed before setting time or step is deactivated, action is not executed. R SL (Stored & time Limited) It continues its execution when the time is being set or unit R qualifier is executed. R R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 167 January 2011 Honeywell

168 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit ATTENTION You can insert a time expression such as T#1h2m3s T#2m T#15s. program can be written by LD ST or SFC. Edit block property You can edit block s property name, comment, and other details. Perform the following steps to edit the Block property of a location. 1 Move the cursor to the location you want to edit. 2 Press Enter key or double-click the block. The Block Properties window displays. The field description for Block Properties window are as follows: Field Label Description Name Comment List Less OK Cancel Enter block s name. Enter the block s comment. Displays the other block used in the current program. Hides the list. Click to save the contents and to close the window. Click to close the window. ATTENTION Block can be written by only SFC program. cannot be connected with block. 168 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

169 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit Edit label property You can edit label s name. Perform the following steps to edit Label property of a block. 1 Move the cursor to the block you want to edit. 2 Press Enter key or double-click the block. The Label Properties window displays. The field description for Label Properties window are as follows: Field Label Description Name List OK Cancel Enter label name. Displays the name of other labels used in the current program. Click to save the contents and to close the window. Click to close the window. Jump property You can edit jump s name. Perform the following steps to edit Jump property of a program. 1 Move the cursor to the location you want to edit. 2 Press Enter key or double-click a block. The field description for Jump Properties window are as follows: Field Label Description Name List OK Enter jump name. Displays the name of other labels used in the current program. Click to save the contents and to close the window. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 169 January 2011 Honeywell

170 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit Cancel Click to close the window. ATTENTION Ensure that the name of the Jump is the same as label name. Jump to other SFC program is not available. Set branch priority You can set branch priority. Perform the following steps to set branch priority. 1 Move the cursor to the select branch s start location. 2 Click Edit > Set Branch Priority. 3 Click the select branch s start location in order to set branch priority. 4 To complete the editing, click outside the selection branch. ATTENTION You can set selection branch priority equal to the branch number. When not setting branch priority, compilation is initiated from left to right. Program is executed from left to right. 170 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

171 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit Erase branch priority You can erase branch priority. Perform the following steps to erase branch priority. 1 Move the cursor to the branch that has priority. 2 Click Edit > Erase Branch Priority. 3 Branch priority is erased. Delete item You can delete a step, transition, action, block, label, jump, and branch of a program. Perform the following steps to delete an existing item. 1 Move the cursor to the location where the item you want to delete exists. 2 Click Edit > Delete. ATTENTION The transition and blocks can be deleted by performing the above step. Sometimes deleting is not available. In this case, editing is canceled automatically after the warning message. Deleting a branch deletes all items under the branch. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 171 January 2011 Honeywell

172 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit Copy/cut/paste Perform the following steps to copy and paste data. 1 Select the block/function you want to copy. 2 Click Edit > Copy. 3 Copied area displays. 4 Move the cursor to the location you want to paste. 5 Click Edit > Paste. ATTENTION The item under step, transition and block can be copied with step, transition and block according to selected location. Sometimes pasting is not available according to the location to paste. At this time, editing is canceled automatically. When copying the branch start point, the item under branch is copied with branch start point. When pasting the branch, select the branch start point. 172 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

173 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit The selection branch can be pasted into the selection branch and the parallel branch can be pasted into the parallel branch. When pasting into the action, select the step you want to paste. Principal to paste is same with item input. Cut/paste Perform the following steps to Cut and Paste data. 1 Select the location to cut. 2 Click Edit > Cut. 3 Move the cursor to the location to paste. 4 Click Edit > paste. Undo and redo SoftMaster provides the standard undo and redo options. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 173 January 2011 Honeywell

174 7. SFC Edit 7.3. Program edit Undo (example) Perform the following steps to undo an action. 1 Place the cursor to the location you want to delete. 2 Click Edit > Delete. 3 Click Edit > Undo. Deleting is cancelled. Redo (example) Perform the following steps to redo an action. Click Edit > Redo to redo an action. ATTENTION 174 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

175 7. SFC Edit 7.4. View program You can Undo and Redo for all items. Unlimited number of undo is available. Program edit mode SFC program supports only insert mode. Insert mode: 7.4 View program You can zoom in or zoom out on a program. Program zoom in/out Zoom in To Zoom In: Click View > Zoom In. Zoom out To Zoom Out: Click View > Zoom Out. TIP Hold the CTRL key on your keyboard and spin the mouse wheel forward to zoom-in. Hold the CTRL key on your keyboard and spin the mouse wheel backward to zoom-out. On the View Tool selection box, the user can select or directly enter the magnification. SFC property It enables you to edit SFC property. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 175 January 2011 Honeywell

176 7. SFC Edit 7.4. View program To edit SFC property, perform the following steps: Click Tools > Options > SFC. a) Show comment: Displays the comment of step, transition, action, and block. b) Show print area: Displays the printing area with thick dotted line. c) Show page number: Displays page number printed in the print area. d) column width: Sets width of vertical column of step, transition location. e) column width: Displays width of vertical column of action location. f) Utilize SFC split window: You can use SFC split window. g) Split window position: You may decide in which direction the window gets divided. h) Split window contents: You may decide which contents the program displays in the split window. ATTENTION The range of the column is 20~200. The range of the column is 70~ SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

177 7. SFC Edit 7.4. View program Show comment <Not Showing comment> <Showing comment> Show print area Show page number R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 177 January 2011 Honeywell

178 7. SFC Edit 7.4. View program column width < column 68 pixel (basic) screen> < column 100 pixel screen> column width < column100 pixel (basic) screen> < column 150 pixel screen> 178 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

179 7. SFC Edit 7.4. View program Utilize SFC split window <With split window> <Without split window> R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 179 January 2011 Honeywell

180 7. SFC Edit 7.4. View program Split window contents <Viewing the selected action, transition: when selecting action> <Viewing the identical SFC program> 180 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

181 7. SFC Edit 7.4. View program Split window position <Viewing the fix split window contents: displays the previous screen> <Right> R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 181 January 2011 Honeywell

182 7. SFC Edit 7.4. View program View block/action/transition list <Bottom> You can check other programs list used in the SFC program and edit the name and comment. Perform the following steps to view Block//Transition List. 1 Click View > Block//Transition List. 2 The list displays. 182 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

183 7. SFC Edit 7.4. View program Open action/transition In the SFC program, open the selected action, transition with the new window. Perform the following steps to open /Transition. 1 Move the cursor to the location you want to open the program. 2 Click View > Open /Transition. 3 Open the selected program in a new window. Address/variables Displays variables or address used in the contact, coil, function (block) as Address/Variables name. If variable does not have an address, it displays the variable name. To view Address/Variables: Click View > Address/Variables. Address/comments Displays variables or addresses used in the contact, coil, function (block) as Address/Comment. If the variable does not have an address, it displays the name of the variable. To view Address/Comments: Click View > Address/Comments. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 183 January 2011 Honeywell

184 7. SFC Edit 7.5. Edit additional function ATTENTION Modifying the settings may result in increased viewing time based on the program size. When printing, Address/Variables/Comments is supported. For additional information, refer Print. Adjust contact number It is used to adjust the number of contact points displayed on the window. Here, the number of contact points is equal to the total number (horizontal cell - 1), excluding the output position. To adjust the number of contact points: Click View > Change columns > Contact no. If the data to the right of the current window is larger than the number of contact points to display, it may be displayed by rung including arrow. ATTENTION It may increase or decrease one by one in View > Toolbox. The number of contact to set is 9 ~ 31. The number of contact points minimally set in LD program used for SFC action and transition is SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

185 7. SFC Edit 7.5. Edit additional function 7.5 Edit additional function SoftMaster provides an edit additional function for convenience of edit. Bookmark setting It enables the user to easily move to a specific area with the bookmark specified on the line. For more information, refer to Bookmark. Go to You can go to designated line, edited label, and rung comment. For more information, refer to Go to. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 185 January 2011 Honeywell

186 7. SFC Edit 7.5. Edit additional function 186 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

187 8.1 Cross reference 8. Programming It is used to display the application details of all the addresses and variables used in a program. It includes contact points (normally open contact point, normally closed contact point, positive transition pulse contact point and negative transition pulse contact point), coils (coil, reverse coil, positive transition pulse coil and negative transition pulse coil), I/O parameter of function(block) and all the addresses and variables used as the operand of extended functions. View all addresses It is used to display all the addresses used in the current PLC. To view all the addresses in a PLC, click View > Cross Reference. The Message Window displays. The field description for Message Window are as follows: Field Label Address Variable Name PLC Program Position Comment Description Displays the names of all the addresses used in the current PLC. Displays the names of all variables used in the current PLC. Displays names of PLC belonging to the current program. Displays the name of the program using the applicable address. Displays the coordinates inside the program. Displays the comment of address and variables. The following signs are displayed for the type of instructions: -( )-: Coil -(/)-: Reverse coil Information -(S)-: Set coil -(R)-: Reset coil -(P)-: Positive transition pulse coil -(N)-: Negative transition pulse coil R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 187 January 2011 Honeywell

188 8. Programming 8.1. Cross reference Field Label Description - -: Normally open contact point - / -: Normally closed contact point - P -: Positive transition pulse contact point - N -: Negative transition pulse contact point -[F]-: Extended function parameter -VAR-: Function(block) I/O parameter Data sorting Click the column header to sort the applicable column. Whenever you click the column, it is sorted in the ascending and then descending sequence, repeatedly. A triangle is displayed on the basic column of the current alignment. The normal triangle indicates that the data is sorted in the ascending sequence, and a reverse triangle indicates that the data is sorted in the descending sequence. Example 1: Alignment in the ascending sequence based on the address names. Example2: Alignment in the descending sequence based on the address names. Go to It is used to go to the position of the program using the selected address. Double-click the applicable line, or right-click to select Go To from the menu. 188 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

189 8. Programming 8.1. Cross reference Select row It is used to display the specific data only on the screen. Right-click and select each item from the Select Row menu. Lock data Delete data Details of the Cross Reference Window are updated when the cursor moves in the program. If you do not want to update them, specify the Fix function. Right-click and select Lock Data. It deletes all the details of the Cross Reference Window. Output cross reference instantly If an address or variable is selected in the program, the used position and the application are displayed. Perform the following steps to view the output cross-reference instantly. 1 Select the Cross Reference tab to display the Cross Reference Result. Move the cursor to the position of the address to display its purpose. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 189 January 2011 Honeywell

190 8. Programming 8.2. Used address ATTENTION If Output cross reference instantly is used, the edit speed is likely to slow down. Select Tools > Options > Edit Ladder/Mnemonic, on the Edit page, select Output cross reference instantly option. Check duplicate coil instantly This function is used to check the applicable address or variable if used as duplicate whenever the coil is edited. If the address is used as a coil in a different location inside the PLC, the list for the program name, location and step displays. Perform the following steps to check a duplicated coil instantly: 1 Add a coil. 2 Select and copy the line where the applicable coil is included. Move to the next line and paste. ATTENTION If check duplicated coil instantly is used, the edit speed may be slow. Select Tools > Options > Edit Ladder/Mnemonic, on the Edit page, select Check duplicated coil instantly option. Check duplicated coil instantly checks the coil and the reverse coil, positive transition pulse coil, and negative transition pulse coil. 190 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

191 8. Programming 8.2. Used address 8.2 Used address It shows all the addresses and the numbers used in the program (LD, SFC). The addresses used in each address area according to the designated types are displayed as classified into input and output. Viewing used address a) Address Display: Displays each address used in the program. b) Word Column: Displays the number of the applicable address types used in the program. The column displays the number in accordance with the address type designated when executing the address used. c) Bit Column: Displays the number of applicable bit addresses used in the program. The addresses of S area, T area, and C area are displayed. The column displays the addresses of the types smaller than those designated when executing the used address in bit type. Therefore, if designating word type, it displays the bit only. If the column designates 16 data types, 8 columns are created. d) I/O classification: Displays the number of applicable bit addresses as classified into input (I) and output (O). e) It displays 1 address using the 5th bit of %MW1 as the output. f) It displays 1 address using %MW2 as the input. To view a used address: 1 Click View > Used Address. 2 Select a desirable address on the Used I/O Selection Dialog window. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 191 January 2011 Honeywell

192 8. Programming 8.2. Used address The field description for Used I/O Selection Dialog window are as follows: Field Label Address Area Selection Address Type Selection Description Selects an address area. The available areas are All. Selects an address type, Bit. ATTENTION Select Update Used Address on the context menu to display the used addresses Editing the program after Used Address is executed, does not update the content of the Used Address automatically. If you want to see the Used Address of edited program, again select Update Used Address. View address uses Double-click the cell where the used I/O figures are displayed or click View Address Uses from the context menu. The View Address Uses window displays. The field description for View Address Uses are as follows: Field Label Description PLC Address used Program Address Type IN/OUT Instruction Displays the PLC name with the applicable Address used. It is the Address that the View Address Uses window shows. Displays the program name with the applicable Address used. Displays the address used in the program. Displays the address type used in the program. Displays whether the address is used as Input or Output. Displays the instruction type of operand for which the applicable address is used. (Displayed as identical as 192 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

193 8. Programming 8.3. Check program Field Label Position Comment Go To Description the instruction tool bar of LD editor.) Displays the position in the program. Displays the comment of a selected address. The function to go to the program using the address of a selected line. 8.3 Check program This function is used to check the prepared LD program for errors. The following items are checked. Logic Error: checks for LD connection errors. Grammar Error: checks for grammatical errors used in SBRT/CALL, FOR/NEXT, and so on. Duplicated Coil Error: checks for errors if duplicate output items are used. Check program setting To check a program setting: 1 Click View > Check Program. The Program Check window displays. By default, Program Check tab is selected. The field description for Program Check window are as follows: Field Label Description Program Check Tab Logic Error Grammar Error Unreferenced label Used to check for program s logic errors such as LD connection errors and short circuit. Used to check for errors in the application instructions such as CALL/SBRT, MCS/MCSCLR, and so on. Used to specify the processing range of the declared label which was not used. You can select Ignore, Warning or Error. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 193 January 2011 Honeywell

194 8. Programming 8.3. Check program Unreferenced subroutine Duplicated coil error Strict check on data type Check program size Report unused variables Current program (modbus) All programs Used to specify the processing range of the declared subroutine which was not used. You can select Ignore, Warning or Error. Used to check for the Duplicated Coil error. Used to select Error or Warning for the Duplicated Coil. Displays program size when checking. Displays unused variables when checking. Used to check the current program only. Used to check all the programs listed on the current PLC item. Duplicate Coil Check Tab Checking Address Specification Checking Option OK Cancel Sets the address and variable area to check. Designates whether to check duplicated coil for a function (block) output. Click to save the setting and to close the window. Click to close the window. ATTENTION Ignore: Used to ignore errors. Warning: If any error occurs, a Warning is displayed on the Result Window and writing a program on PLC is available. Error: If any error occurs, Error is displayed on the Result Window and writing a program on PLC is unavailable. 194 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

195 8. Programming 8.3. Check program ATTENTION For additional details on Logic Error and Grammar Error, refer to Logic error and Grammar error. If the current program is selected while one or more programs are listed on the current PLC item, CALL/SBRT is not checked. When writing a program on the PLC, all the items except the Duplicated Coil are always checked even if it is not specified by the user. In the 2MLI series of PLC, many programs can be added to the PLC item and the SBRT call is available between programs. ATTENTION Set coil (-(S)-) and Reset coil (-(R)-) are not checked for Duplicate Coil. In the Function (block) output check, the range is determined by the parameter type. Check result trace Logic error If any error occurs on the program, its details are displayed on the Program Inspect tab of the message window. Double-click the error details to move to the location where the error occurs. It is used to check for any logic error, and displays its details and location. 1. L0000: Input or output is not connected. This error occurs if the contact point is not connected with the power line. : Correct the LD program to prevent an input-output disconnect. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 195 January 2011 Honeywell

196 8. Programming 8.3. Check program 2. L0100: It is a short circuit. This error occurs if the area connected with the OR is connected with the horizontal line without the contact point. : Delete OR if the OR connection is not necessary any more, or enter the contact point in the applicable location. 3. L0200: Address or variable is not input. This error occurs if the address or variable is not input in the contact point or coil. : Input a proper address in the contact point or coil where the error occurs. 4. L0300: OR-LOAD incorrectly connected. This error occurs if OR-LOAD is connected incorrectly. 196 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

197 8. Programming 8.3. Check program : Search for OR-LOAD incorrectly connected and then correct the LD program. 5. L0400: Specified number of contact points is exceeded. This error occurs if the number of continuous LOAD instructions exceeds 32. : Correct the LD program to limit the LOAD instructions within L0401: Incorrect input. This error occurs if the input necessary is nonexistent. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 197 January 2011 Honeywell

198 8. Programming 8.3. Check program : Add the necessary input to the input terminal. 7. L0402: Incorrect input. This error occurs if the input unnecessary is existent. : Delete the input unnecessary from the input terminal. 8. L0404: The maximum number of MPUSH exceeded. This error occurs if the number of continuous MPUSH/MPOP exceeds SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

199 8. Programming 8.3. Check program : Correct the LD program to limit the continuous MPUSH/MPOP to L0406: Application instruction in error. This error occurs if the application instruction is not existent in the 2MLI series PLC used. : Replace the instruction with the one provided by the 2MLI series of PLC. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 199 January 2011 Honeywell

200 8. Programming 8.3. Check program ATTENTION This error occurs if GMWIN series PLC project file is converted to 2MLI project. Grammar error This function is used to check for grammar related errors generated when an application instruction is used. 1. E1001: Label declared as duplicate. This error occurs if duplicated LABEL is used. : Delete the duplicated label, or change the name of the label. E1002: Label Name is nonexistent. This error occurs if JMP is used to refer to the nonexistent label. : Add the label where the error occurs, or correct the JMP instruction which uses the label. E1003: Label Name is not used. This error occurs if the JMP instruction is not used in the program. 200 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

201 8. Programming 8.3. Check program : Delete the label, or add the application JMP instruction. E1004: Label Name not used in the subroutine. This error occurs if the JMP instruction is not used in the program. : Delete the label in the subroutine, or add the application JMP instruction. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 201 January 2011 Honeywell

202 8. Programming 8.3. Check program ATTENTION The error number E1003/E1004 occurs only when Warning or Error is selected for the label not referred in the Grammar Error, not selected in the View > Check Program option. For additional information, refer Check program. E1005: Label Name is nonexistent in the subroutine. This error occurs if the JMP instruction uses the label nonexistent in the subroutine. : Add the label in the subroutine, or correct the JMP instruction. E2001: Return instruction is nonexistent in the subroutine, Subroutine Name. The subroutine is finished with the RET instruction. : Add the RET instruction in the subroutine block. 202 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

203 8. Programming 8.3. Check program E2010: Subroutine call is nonexistent. The call of nonexistent SBRT causes an error. : Add the SBRT~RET blocks of the subroutine name to call. E2003: Subroutine Name is positioned prior to END instruction. SBRT and RET positioned prior to END instruction causes an error. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 203 January 2011 Honeywell

204 8. Programming 8.3. Check program : Move the application instructions SBRT and RET to the position after the end of the instruction. E2011: Subroutine not used. Although SBRT~RET blocks exist, no CALL instruction is available to use the applicable subroutine. : Delete the subroutine not being used, or add the CALL instruction. 204 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

205 8. Programming 8.3. Check program ATTENTION The error number E2011 occurs only when Warning or Error is selected for the subroutine not referred to in the Grammar Error Inspect item. For additional information, refer Check program. E2012: Subroutine declared as duplicate. Subroutine Name: An identical name of the subroutine cannot be used. : Change the duplicated name of the subroutine. E2014: The maximum number of subroutines exceeded. Based on the PLC type, the maximum number of subroutines is exceeded. : Check the number of the subroutines used. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 205 January 2011 Honeywell

206 8. Programming 8.3. Check program ATTENTION The maximum number of subroutines usable depends on the PLC type. For details, refer to 2MLI CPU user s guide. E3001: Equal number of NEXT unavailable. If the number FOR/NEXT instructions are not equal, it causes this error. : Let the number of FOR instructions and NEXT instructions be the same. E3002: Equal number of FOR unavailable. If the number FOR/NEXT instructions are not equal, it causes this error. : Let the number of FOR instructions and NEXT instructions be identical. 206 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

207 8. Programming 8.3. Check program E3003: FOR-NEXT cannot be nested more than 16 times. FOR/NEXT can be duplicated up to 16 blocks. If the number of the duplicated FOR/NEXT blocks exceeds 16, it causes an error. : Limit the number of the FOR/NEXT blocks not to exceed 16. E3004: Between FOR-NEXT, RET or END is not available. If RET or END is included between FOR and NEXT, it causes an error. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 207 January 2011 Honeywell

208 8. Programming 8.3. Check program : Change the location of the END and RET instruction positioned between FOR/NEXT blocks. E3005: BREAK singly used. BREAK instruction can be used only between FOR/NEXT blocks. : Change the location of BREAK instruction : needs one or more scan program. There is no scan program in the current PLC item, which causes an error. : Add an applicable program item to the Project Scan Program : There is no program to check. There is no program in the current PLC item. : Add a scan program and try again. E1300: An element (instruction) not available in user-defined function (UDF). : The function block and positive (negative) transition pulse contact point (coil) are not available in UDF. 208 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

209 8. Programming 8.3. Check program ATTENTION The elements cannot be inserted in UDF Edit but they can be inserted by using Paste and other functions in other programs. E1310: The return value needs at least, one or more outputs. : The VAR_RETURN type variable is not designated in UDF, which causes an error. Check whether the variable is used in the program. E1400: needs the TRANS output. : TRANS variable is not designated as the output in the SFC Transition Program created by LD, which causes an error. Check whether the variable is used as output in the program. E5000: Needs one or more INIT_DONE instruction to end the initialization task. : Although the initialization task is added, the conditions to end the initialization task are not designated. To normally end the scan program, the conditions to end the initialization task must be designated. L0700: Undeclared variable : The variable used as the IO parameter of contact point, coil, and function (Block) is not declared. Check whether the variable is declared in the local variable. L0701: Input unsuitable data type. : The type of used address or variable is not suitable. Check the type of used address or variable. L0702: Invalid input connection : The line connection of function (block) is only available for BOOL type. The input here needs a non-bool type input. L0703: Function (block) cannot have more than one input line. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 209 January 2011 Honeywell

210 8. Programming 8.3. Check program : Check the connection to ensure that the Function (block) does not have more than one input line. L0704: Invalid output connection : The line connection of function (block) is only available for BOOL type. Since line cannot be connected to other type but BOOL, check the line output. L0705: Function (block) must not have more than one output line. : Function (block) must not have more than one output line. Check the line connection. L0706: Incorrect function IO type. 210 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

211 8. Programming 8.3. Check program : In case of the function (block) having ANY type as the IO parameter, the data type of IO parameter indicated as ANY type must be the same. Check the data type of the input IO parameter. ATTENTION If the strict data type check is not set in the program check options, it checks the only IO parameter size of the function (block). L0707: The size of array is not same. : The size of array used in MOVE function as the IO parameter must be same. L0708: Unknown function. : Unavailable function. Check whether the function is user-defined function. L0709: Instance name is omitted. : The instance name is omitted in the function block. Check the input items. L0710: Instance type is not the same. : The instance type of function block is not identical with the function block. Check the input items. L0711: Undeclared instance. : The function block instance is not declared in the local variable. Declare the function block instance in the local variable before use. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 211 January 2011 Honeywell

212 8. Programming 8.3. Check program 212 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

213 9.1 Find address 9. Find/Replace The Find/Replace function is used to find or change the address and the string in LD, SFC, and Variable/Comment of SoftMaster. Perform the following steps to find an address. 1 Click Find/Replace > Find Address. The Find Address window displays. The field description for Find Address window are as follows: Field Label Find what Include all subaddresses/vari able names Output to pane 2 Direction Range Find Next Find All Advanced>> Description Used to specify the address to find. Used to select the address type containing the address to find. Then, if you select the checkbox, it finds %IB0.1.0, %IW0.1.0, %IL0.1.0, and others containing %IX SoftMaster has two Find result windows. The result displays in Find 1 result window, but if you select the Output to pane 2, the result displays in Find 2 result window. Used to specify the location to find upward or downward from the line currently selected in the respective editor. Selects to find by designating a specific line after designating the direction. If Range is selected, the start and end lines must be also entered. Finds the detail specified, next to the line (position) currently selected. If the applicable address is found, the position where the applicable address is located is selected. Finds all the details specified above to display the result on the find result window. It is only applicable in LD editor. Click Advanced>> to expand the selection. Used to find specific contact point, coil, extended function, and function/function block used in LD editor. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 213 January 2011 Honeywell

214 9. Find/Replace 9.1. Find address ATTENTION The result is displayed on the find window only with Find All run. Since Find All finds all details in the applicable documents, it is insignificant to select the direction. Advanced>> is displayed only in Ladder editor. Advanced>> (extension) is as shown in the following figure. Find next address It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable, Variable and Local Variable in common. Based on LD, details of this function are described as follows: Perform the following steps to find the next address. 1 Select the basic cell of the direction. 2 Click Find/Replace > Find Address. The Find Address window displays. 3 Specify the address to find, the direction, and the options. 4 Click Find Next. If address is found identical to the detail as specified on the dialog box, move to the address whose cell is identical. 214 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

215 9. Find/Replace 9.2. Find text ATTENTION If no address identical to the specified address is found, the following message appears. Find Next finds all the current programs based on the selected cell when the address find dialog box displays. If the direction is set Downward, it starts finding the address from the cell next to the selected cell to the last cell of the program, and then from the starting cell of the program. Find all address It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable, and Local Variable in common. Based on LD, the details of this function are described and perform the following steps to find all addresses. 1 Click Find/Replace > Find Address. The Find Address window displays. 2 Specify the address to find, the direction and the options. 3 Click Find All. Find All yields its result on the find message window as in the following figure. 4 On the find window, select the line to find and then click Enter to move the cell to the line of the applicable LD program. ATTENTION Find All finds the address in all the programs included in the current PLC. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 215 January 2011 Honeywell

216 9. Find/Replace 9.2. Find text 9.2 Find text Finding text This function is used to find the String of Rung Comment, Variable, Variable Comment, Application Instruction, and Label. It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable, Variable and Local Variable. Based on LD, the details of this function are described as follows: Perform the following steps to find text. 1 Select the basic cell of the direction. 2 Click Find/Replace > Find Text. The Find String window displays. The field description for Find String window are as follows: Field Label Find what: Match whole word only Case-sensitive Output to pane 2 Direction Find Next Find All Description Used to specify the String to find. Selecting All Identical finds the string exactly identical to the string specified in detail to find. If it is not selected, it also finds the string where the detail to find is included. Selecting this option finds the string exactly identical to the string. SoftMaster has two find result windows. The result displays in the Find 1 result window, but if you select the Output to pane 2, the result displays in Find 2 result window. Used to specify the location to find upward or downward from the line currently selected in the respective editor. Finds the detail specified, next to the line (position) currently selected. If the applicable String is found, the position where the applicable String is located is selected. Finds all the details specified to display the result in the Find result window. 216 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

217 9. Find/Replace 9.2. Find text Range Advanced>> If Range is selected, Find String is run in a specific step. If you select Range, you must enter the start and last steps. It is only applicable in LD editor. Click Advanced>> to expand and Advanced<< to close the selection. It is used to find specific contact point, specific coil and application instruction used in LD editor. 3 Specify the String to find, the selection options, and the direction. 4 Click Find Next. If a string identical to the specified detail is found on the dialog box, it moves to the string whose cell is identical. ATTENTION If no string identical to the specified string is found, the following message appears. Find Next finds the current programs based on the selected cell when the String Find dialog box displays. If the direction is set Downward, it begins finding the String from the cell next to the selected cell to the last cell of the program, and then from the starting cell of the program. ATTENTION The result is displayed on the Find windows 1 or 2 only when Find All is run. Since Find All finds all details in the applicable documents, the direction is not significant to select. Advanced>> is displayed only in LD editor. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 217 January 2011 Honeywell

218 9. Find/Replace 9.2. Find text Find all text It is used for LD, SFC, IL, Global/Direct Variable and Local Variable in common. Perform the following steps to find a particular text. 1 Click Find/Replace > Find String. The Find String window displays. 2 Specify the string to find, the selection options, and the direction. 3 Click Find All. Find All displays the results on the find message window as in the following figure. 4 On the find window, select the line to find and then click Enter to move the cell to the line of the applicable LD program. ATTENTION Find All finds the string in all the programs included in the current PLC. 218 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

219 9. Find/Replace 9.3. Address replacement 9.3 Address replacement Replace address This function is used to change the address previously made in LD Editor, IL Editor, or Variable/Comment Editor. It is used for LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment. This function is used to find a previously created address. Details of this function are described as follows based on LD. Perform the following steps to replace an address. 1 Select the basic cell of the direction. 2 Click Find/Replace > Replace Address. The Replace Address window displays. 3 Specify the details to find and replace the type and the direction. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 219 January 2011 Honeywell

220 9. Find/Replace 9.3. Address replacement The field description for Replace Address window are as follows: Find what Field Label Replace with Find including lower type Replace with range Include Variable Range Area Direction Range Find Next Replace Description Used to specify the address to find. Used to specify the address to replace with. If you select the checkbox when finding the address containing the address input in Find With, it finds %IB0.1.0, %ID0.1.0, %IL0.1.0 and others including %IX Used to replace with a range. If the number of address and the range matches the addresses can be changed instantly. Selects whether to replace the variable/comment of the input address with the variable/comment of the address to replace. That is, selects whether to replace with the variable/comment of the address. Designates the number of address for replace with range. It is activated only if you select the checkbox, Replace with range. Selects whether to include by address types. If hanging %IL0.0.1, for instance, they can be replaced with range by selecting bit, byte, word and double word less than L area, respectively. Used to specify the location to find upward or downward from the line currently selected in the corresponding editor. If selecting Range, Address Change can be run within a specific line. If you select Range, you must enter the start and last lines. Finds the details specified, in the next to the line (position) currently selected. If the applicable address is found, the position where the applicable address is located is selected. Replaces the address as specified above 220 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

221 9. Find/Replace 9.3. Address replacement based on the currently selected position (line). Replace All Advanced>> Replaces all the details specified above after found. It is only used in Ladder editor. Click Advanced>> to expand and Advanced<< to close the selection. It is used to find specific contact point, specific coil and extended function/function block used in Ladder editor. 4 Click Replace. The selected cell is replaced with the address specified for replacement. ATTENTION Replace finds all the current programs based on the selected cell when the address Replace dialog box displays. If the direction is set downward, it starts to find the address identical from the cell selected to the last of the programs, and then the address identical, again from the first of the programs to the basic cell. The direction need not be selected in case of Replace All. If Replace with range is selected, Replace All only is available. Advanced>> is displayed only in LD editor. Replace all addresses It is used for the LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment editor. This is used to find the previously created address. Replacing all addresses Perform the following steps to replace all addresses. 1 Click Find/Replace > Replace Address. The Replace Address window. 2 Specify the details to find and replace the type and the direction. 3 Click Replace All. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 221 January 2011 Honeywell

222 9. Find/Replace 9.3. Address replacement 4 Once the Replace All is completed in the current program, the following message appears. Replace with range It is used to change consecutive addresses in bulk. For example, the addresses of %MX1 ~ %MX10 can be changed to %MX100 ~ %MX109. Example, if the detail to find is %MX1, the detail to change %MX100 and the number of address is 10. Perform the following steps to replace the number of addresses with a range: 1 Click Find/Replace > Replace Address. 2 Specify the details to Find and Replace the type and the direction, Select Replace with Range check box and then enter the number of addresses to replace with range. 3 Click Replace All. ATTENTION Replace with range is available only for the addresses, not for the constants. 222 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

223 9. Find/Replace 9.4. Text replacement 9.4 Text replacement Replace text string This function is used to find and replace the text string of Comment, Variable, and so on, except the address. It is used for LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment editor in common. It is used to find the previously created addresses. Based on LD, the details of this function are described as follows. ATTENTION Advanced>> is displayed only in Ladder editor. Perform the following steps to replace a string. 1 Select the basic cell of the direction. 2 Click Find/Replace > Replace String. The Replace String window displays. 3 Specify the String to find and replace the selection options and the direction. The field description for Replace String window are as follows: Field Label Replace With Find What Match whole word only Case-sensitive Include variable Direction Description Used to specify the string to find. Used to specify the string to replace. If Match whole word only is selected, it finds the string exactly identical to the string specified. If you select this check box, it finds the string only exactly identical to the string with case-sensitive characters sorted out. If not selected, it finds the string in characters not sorted out. If you select this check box, the variable is also replaced as applicable when the string is replaced. If this is not selected, the variable is not included in the replace when the string is replaced. Used to specify the location to find upward or downward from the line currently selected in the respective editor. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 223 January 2011 Honeywell

224 9. Find/Replace 9.4. Text replacement Range Find Next Replace Replace All Advanced>> If you select a range, replace string can be run within a specific line. If you select Range, you must enter the first and last steps. Finds the detail specified, in the next to the line (position) currently selected. If the applicable string is found, the cell moves to the position where the applicable string is located. Replaces the detail specified above after found. Replaces all the details specified have been found. It is only used in Ladder editor. Click Advanced>> to expand and Advanced<< to close the selection. It is used to find specific contact point, specific coil, extended function, function/function block used in Ladder editor. 4 Click Replace. The selected string is replaced with the string specified for replacement. ATTENTION Replace is available only when the string of the cell currently selected is identical to the detail to find as specified on the dialog box. Click Replace to move to the next cell identical to the detail to find as specified on the dialog box regardless of the execution of Replace. Replace finds all the current programs based on the selected cell when the address Replace dialog box displays. Replace finds all the current programs based on the selected cell when the address Replace dialog box displays. If the direction is set downward, it starts to find the address identical from the cell selected to the last of the programs, and then the address identical again from the first of the programs to the basic cell. Replace finds all the current programs based on the selected cell when the Replace String dialog box displays. If the direction is set downward, it starts to find the string identical from the cell selected to the last of the programs, and then again from the first of the programs to the basic cell. 224 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

225 9. Find/Replace 9.5. Find again Replace all string It is used for LD editor, SFC editor and Variable/Comment editor. It is used to find the previously created address. Perform the following steps to replace all strings. 1 Click Find/Replace > Replace String. The Replace String window displays. 2 Specify the details to Find and Replace the selection options and the direction. 3 Click Replace All. 4 If Replace All is complete in the current program, the following message appears for you to decide to Replace in the other programs. 9.5 Find again Find Again is used to find the details of Find Address or Find String again if once run previously. If Find was not run previously, it is inactive. Select Find/Replace > Find Again. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 225 January 2011 Honeywell

226 9. Find/Replace 9.5. Find again 226 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

227 10.1 Basic parameter 10. Parameters Basic parameter setting It is used to specify the basic parameters related with the PLC operation. To access Basic Parameter settings: 1 On the project tree, double-click Parameter > Basic Parameter. The Basic Parameter Setting window displays. 2 The field description for Basic Parameter Setting > Basic Operation Setup window are as follows: Field Label Fixed period operation Watchdog timer Standard Input Filter Restart Method Disable the reset switch Disable the overall reset switch Output during debugging Keep Output when an error occurs Description Used to decide to run the PLC program based on the fixed period operation or based on the scan time. Type the operation time in ms unit. Used to specify the time value of the scan watch-dog timer to keep PLC from stopping due to program error. Used to specify the standard input value. For more details, refer Detailed module information setting. Sets the restart mode. Select either cold or warm restart. When this option is selected, the switch is moved to left side and return to normal position. When this option is selected, the switch is moved to left side and pressed it for more than 3 seconds and then returns to normal position. Used to decide to output the data to the module as usual or not even while being debugged. Used to decide to output the data to the module as usual or not even when an error or a specific input occurs. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 227 January 2011 Honeywell

228 10. Parameters Basic parameter Keep Output when converting RUN- >STOP Keep Output when converting STOP- >RUN Save the latest SOE events Save the first SOE events Disable the D.CLR reset switch Disable the overall D.CLR reset switch Used to decide to output the data to the module as usual or not even when PLC operation mode changes from RUN to STOP. Used to decide to output the data to the module as usual or not even when PLC operation mode changes from STOP to RUN. Used to save the most recent SOE events. Used to save the first SOE event. When this option is selected, the switch is moved to right side and return to normal position. The general data area and retain area (M, Automatic variable) is cleared. When this option is selected, the switch is moved to left side and pressed it for more than 3 seconds and then returns to normal position. The general data area, retain area (M, Automatic variable) and R area are cleared. 228 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

229 10. Parameters Basic parameter 3 Retain Area Setup: Sets the options necessary for Retain Area in the Basic Parameter information. M area Retain setting: Sets the M area (retain area) to preserve the data when PLC is restarted. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 229 January 2011 Honeywell

230 10. Parameters Basic parameter 3 Error Operation Setup tab: Specifies the operation method when an error occurs on the PLC. The field description for Basic Parameter Setting > Error Operation Setup window are as follows: Field Label Continue running when a fuse error occurs Continue running when an I/O module error occurs Continue running when a special module error occurs Continue running when a communication module error occurs Continue running when an extended base error occurs Description If this option is selected, the PLC runs even if an error occurs on the fuse connection status of the module during PLC RUN. If you select this option, the PLC runs even if an error occurs on an I/O module during PLC RUN. If you select this option, the PLC runs even if an error occurs on the special module during PLC RUN. If you select this option, the PLC runs even if an error occurs on the communication module. If you select this option, the PLC runs even if an error occurs in the extended base. TIP Configure the Snet module before configuring the Modbus Server or client in serial mode. Configure the FEnet module before configuring the Modbus Server or client in TCP mode. The above settings are accomplished on an extra port in the CPU which is exclusively for Modbus Server in the Serial Mode which eliminates the need for using extra Snet or FEnet module. Refer to the 2MLI CPUU guide to check whether your CPU supports this additional option. 230 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

231 10. Parameters Basic parameter ATTENTION Restart Mode Restart mode is used to define the restart method of CPU when a Restart command is issued to the CPU. Cold Restart To initiate a cold restart, set the restart mode as cold restart. All data is cleared and the initial value of variables is set to zero. Even though the parameter is set to warm restart mode, it starts in cold restart mode when it is run just after the program is changed. Pressing RESET switch during operation (same with online reset instruction), starts in the cold restart mode, regardless of the restart mode set in the parameter. Warm Restart 1. It is run when setting the restart mode of the parameter as warm restart. 2. In case of a warm restart, the following happen: The data set to remain the previous value. The data set only with the initial value are set with the initial values. All other data is cleared to If data is abnormal although the parameter is set in the warm restart (data preservation against interruption is not available), it is run in the cold restart mode. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 231 January 2011 Honeywell

232 10. Parameters I/O parameters 10.2 I/O parameters Setting I/O parameters It is used to specify the I/O type configured in the PLC slot and to set the applicable parameters for each slot. To access I/O Parameters settings: 1 On the project tree, double-click Parameter > I/O Parameters. The I/O Parameter Setting window displays. 2 The field description for I/O Parameter Setting window are as follows: Field Label All Base Set Base Module List Slot Information Delete Slot Delete Base Base Setting Delete All Details Print OK Description Displays base module information and module information per slot. In case module is not designated in slot, it is displayed as Default. Displays the already set base. Displays the base module information and the module information based on slots. If no module is configured in the slot. Edits or displays base s module type for each slot. Deletes all information of the currently selected slot. Deletes all information of the currently selected base. Sets base number of currently selected base. Deletes the configured module and information of all bases. Displays detailed module information. Prints the module type and the module s parameter information specified in the slot. Click to save the changes and to close the dialog box. 232 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

233 10. Parameters I/O parameters Cancel Click to close the dialog box. ATTENTION The 2MLI project type supports the only fixed allocation type. Therefore, the allocation information column is always displayed as disabled. Fixed point assignment and variable point assignment are available for the module assignment method. The fixed point assignment assigns 64 points collectively to a slot while the variable point assignment depends on the module type. Exceptionally 32 points is assigned to the special/communication module, and 16 points to the empty slot. The table below shows the differences between variable assignment and fixed assignment, based on the basic base. Slot Module Name Variable Assignment Fixed Assignment 0 16-point Input P00000 ~ P0000F P00000 ~ P0003F 1 16-point Output P00010 ~ P0001F P00040 ~ P0007F 2 A/D Module P00020 ~ P0002F P00080 ~ P0011F 3 Communication Module P00030 ~ P0003F P00120 ~ P0015F 4 16-point Output P00050 ~ P0005F P00200 ~ P0023F REFERENCE - INTERNAL For additional information on the communication module information setting, refer SoftMaster-NM User s Guide. For additional information on the positioning module, refer APM User s Guide. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 233 January 2011 Honeywell

234 10. Parameters I/O parameters Base module setup Setting the information for a base module It is used to specify the base information about a module. Perform the following steps to set the Base Module Information. 1 Select the base module to specify from the address list (Base 00 to Base 07). 2 Right-click and select Base Setting or click Base Setting. The Base Module Setup window displays. The field description for I/O Parameter Setting window are as follows: Field Label Description Slot OK Cancel Used to enter the maximum number of slots in the base. Click to save the changes and to close the window. Click to close the window. ATTENTION If the specified number of slots is less than the maximum number of slots, the remaining area is not unavailable for editing. Delete base module Perform the following steps to delete the Base Module Information: 1 Select the base module to delete from the address list. 2 Right-click and select Delete Base. 3 You are prompted to confirm the deletion. Click OK to delete the information of the applicable base module. 234 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

235 10. Parameters I/O parameters Module information setting based on slots Module type and detailed module information is described based on slots. Perform the following steps to set the module information settings based on slots: 1 Select the slot to specify the module in the slot information. 2 Select the Module from the drop-down list or right-click and select Edit to view the list of modules. This is applicable only when a module is already configured in the slot. 3 Select the module from the list. ATTENTION The module description can contain a maximum of 128 English characters. I/O parameter edit function Data editing details of Copy, Cut and Paste, based on slots is described as follows: Copy/paste Perform the following steps to copy and paste a selected slot. 1 Select the slot to copy. 2 Right-click the module and select Copy. 3 Select the slot to paste. 4 Right-click and select Paste. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 235 January 2011 Honeywell

236 10. Parameters I/O parameters Cut/paste Perform the following steps to cut and paste a selected slot. 1 Select the slot to cut. 2 Right-click and select Cut. 3 Select the slot to paste. 4 Right-click and select Paste. Undo Perform the following steps to undo a particular action. 1 Select the slot to delete. 2 Right-click and select Delete. 3 Right-click and select Undo. ATTENTION A maximum of 20 last actions can be revoked using the Undo feature. Redo To redo a particular action: Right-click and select Redo. ATTENTION A maximum of 20 actions can be revoked or invoked using the Undo and Redo functions. The shortcut keys used in I/O Parameters Edit cannot be used as the user-defined shortcut key specified in SoftMaster. Click once on a slot to select one slot. To select multiple slots, click on a slot and drag it down to multiple slots. 236 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

237 10. Parameters I/O parameters Detailed module information setting Double-click or click Details to view the detailed module information setting. Input module setting Perform the following steps to set input module setting. 1 Double-click I/O Parameters from the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting window displays. 2 Double-click an input module. The Input Module Setting dialog box displays. The field description for Input Module Setting dialog box are as follows: Field Label Description Filter OK Cancel Used to specify the filter constant value for the input. Click to save the specified details and to close the dialog box. Click to close the dialog box. 3 Click OK to apply the setting. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 237 January 2011 Honeywell

238 10. Parameters I/O parameters ATTENTION Digital module with the input of AC cannot specify the filter value. Standard value of the input filter is specified in basic parameters. For more information, refer to Basic parameter. The input filter used for checking the input signal does not change for the filtering time. The following figure is with the input filter value of 3ms. As the input signal is the same for 3ms from the moment detected, it is processed as normal input signal after 3ms. Output module Perform the following steps to set output module setting. 1 Double-click I/O Parameters from the tree-view. The I/O Parameter Setting window displays. 2 Double-click an output module. The Output Module Setting dialog box displays. 238 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

239 10. Parameters I/O parameters The field description for Output Module Setting dialog box are as follows: Field Label Channel OK Cancel Description One channel is assigned for 8 points, and the emergency output mode can be specified per channel. Click to save the specified details and to close the dialog box. Click to close the dialog box. 3 Click OK to apply the setting. ATTENTION Emergency output value is specified when the CPU is abruptly stopped during RUN. Default for the emergency output is Hold. Module reservation It assigns the points of the module only without any specific module specified. The 16, 32, and 64 points are available for the assignment. Analog Input module On the I/O Parameter Setting window, select Analog Input module and then click Details to view the Parameter Setting dialog box. Perform the following steps to set Analog Input module setting. 1 Double-click I/O Parameters from the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting window displays. 2 Double-click an A/I module. The Analog Input Module Setting dialog box displays. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 239 January 2011 Honeywell

240 10. Parameters I/O parameters The field description for Analog Input Module Setting dialog box are as follows: Field Label All Parameters Settings Maximum/Minimum Value Display OK Cancel Description If you select this option, it changes all the channels applicable parameter values. If the user inputs data, an applicable range displays on the lower-half of the dialog box automatically. If the user changes the parameter value to any other value other than the default, the string color changes from Black to Blue. Click to save the specified details and to close the dialog box. Click to close the dialog box. 3 Click OK to apply the setting. The parameter values are as follows: Parameter Setting Items Default Channels Disable/Enable Disable Input Range Output Type 1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/-10~10V (Voltage Type) 4~20mA/0~20mA (Current Type) 0~16000/-8000~8000/ /0~10000% (Input range changes based on items) 1~5V 4~20mA 0~16000 Filter Process Disable/Enable Disable Filter Constants Average Process Disable/Enable Disable Average Method Count Average/Time Average Count Average Average Value Count Average: , Time Average: SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

241 10. Parameters I/O parameters Analog output module On the I/O Parameters Setting window, select Analog Output module and then click Details to view the Parameters Setting dialog box. Perform the following steps to set Analog Output module setting. 1 Double-click I/O Parameters from the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting window displays. 2 Double-click an A/O module. The Analog Output Module Setting dialog box displays. The field description for Analog Output Module Setting dialog box are as follows: Field Label All Parameters Settings Maximum/Minimum Value Display OK Cancel Description If you select this option, it changes all the channels applicable parameter values. If the user inputs data, an applicable range displays on the lower-half of the dialog box automatically. If the user changes the parameter value to any other value other than the default, the string color changes from Black to Blue. Click to save the specified details and to close the dialog box. Click to close the dialog box. 3 Click OK to apply the setting The parameter values are as follows: Parameter Setting Items Default Channels STOP/RUN STOP Output Range 1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/- 10~10V (Voltage Type) 4~20mA/0~20mA (Current Type) 1~5V 4~20mA R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 241 January 2011 Honeywell

242 10. Parameters I/O parameters Parameter Setting Items Default Input Type Channel Output Type 0~16000/- 8000~8000/ /0~10000% (changes based on output range) Previous/minimum/middle /maximum Value 0~16000 Previous Value High-speed counter module On the I/O Parameters Setting window, select High Speed counter module and then click Details to view the Parameters Setting dialog box. Perform the following steps to set high-speed counter module setting. 1 Double-click I/O Parameters from the tree-view. The I/O Parameter setting window displays. 2 Double-click a high speed counter module. The High-Speed Counter Module Setting dialog box displays. The field description for High-Speed Counter Module Setting dialog box are as follows: Field Label Parameter Area Maximum/Minimum Value Display OK Cancel Description If you select this option, it changes all the channels applicable parameter values. If the user inputs data, an applicable range displays on the lower-half of the dialog box automatically. If the user changes the parameter value to any other value other than the default, the string color changes from Black to Blue. Click to save the specified details and to close the dialog box. Click to close the dialog box. 3 Click OK to apply the setting. 242 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

243 10. Parameters I/O parameters The parameter values are as follows: Parameter Setting Items Default Counter Mode Linear Counter/Ring Counter Linear Counter 2-phase 1-multiplier/2-phase 2- multiplier/ Pulse Input Mode Additional Function Mode 2-phase 4-multiplier/CW-CCW/ 1-phase 1-input 1-multiplier/ 1-phase 1-input 2-multiplier/ 1-phase 2-input 1-multiplier/1-phase 2- input 2-multiplier N/A/Count clear/count latch/ Sampling count/measure input frequency Measure rotations per unit time/count Disable 2-phase 1-multiplier N/A Range Value (ms) (Single Compare) less/(single Compare) less or equal/ Compared Output 0 Mode Compared Output 1 Mode (Single Compare) equal/(single Compare) equal or greater/ (Single Compare) greater/(section Compare) included/ (Section Compare)excluded As identical as specified above (Single Compare) less (Single Compare) less Preset Input Value Ring Counter, Minimum Value Ring Counter, Maximum Value R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 243 January 2011 Honeywell

244 10. Parameters I/O parameters Parameter Setting Items Default Compared Output 0 Minimum Setting Value Compared Output 0 Maximum Setting Value Compared Output 1 Minimum Setting Value Compared Output 1 Maximum Setting Value Number of Pulses per Rotation Frequency Display mode 1Hz/10Hz/100Hz/1000Hz 1Hz ATTENTION Pulse/Rev value option among High-speed counter parameter option is active when the Auxiliary Mode is set to Revolution/Unit time. REFERENCE - INTERNAL For additional information on the communication module, see SoftMaster NM Manual. For additional information on the positioning module, see the APM manual. 244 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

245 10. Parameters I/O parameters I/O parameter print function This function is used for printing the specified I/O parameter and detailed module information specified. Print option setting To print the specified I/O parameter: On I/O Parameter Setting window, select Print > Print. The Print window displays. a) Print All: Prints all I/O configuration table and detailed module information. b) I/O Configuration Table: Prints I/O parameter's module setting details based on slots, description and I/O information assigned. c) Detailed Info of Each Module: Prints the detailed module information for the specified slot module. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 245 January 2011 Honeywell

246 10. Parameters I/O parameters Print preview Perform the following steps to view the Print Preview. 1 On the I/O Parameter Setting window, select Print > Print. The Print window displays. 2 On the Print window, click Preview. Copy to clipboard It is used for copying the I/O parameter table to the clipboard, thus to add onto the String editor, word processor or spread sheet. To copy the data to windows clipboard: On the I/O Parameter Setting window, select Print > Copy to Clipboard. ATTENTION Only I/O configuration table can be copied to clipboard. 246 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

247 11. Online 11.1 Connection options for the PLC It is used to specify the connection network with the PLC. Local connection setting RS-232C or USB connection is available for Local Connection Setting. Click Online > Connection Settings. The Online Settings window displays. The field descriptions for Online Settings window are as follows: Type Field Depth Connect Settings Preview Timeout interval Retrial times Read/Write data size in PLC run mode Description Used to specify communication media (RS-232C, USB, Ethernet, and Modem) to connect to the PLC. Used to specify the connection configuration (Remote 1 and Remote 2) with PLC. Click to connect to PLC using the specified options. Allows detailed setting based on the selected Connection Type. Used to see a graphical preview of all Connect Options. Time-out defines the time after which the attempt to establish communication with the PLC is given up. Defines the number of times to retry connecting to the PLC if communication connection fails. Used to specify the frame size of the data to transfer. This option is available only when the PLC operation is in Run mode. In other modes of operation, data is transferred in the maximum frame size. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 247 January 2011 Honeywell

248 11. Online Connection options for the PLC Using the local RS-232C Perform the following steps to connect through the local RS-232C. 1 On the Online Settings window, select the Connection Type as RS-232C. 2 Click Setting to specify communication speed and communication COM port. 3 Click OK to save the Connection Options. ATTENTION Default is RS-232C COM1 with the communication speed of bps bps and bps available for communication speed. Communication speed is bps for 2MLK Series. Communication ports of COM1 ~ COM8 are available. If USB serial device is used, a virtual COM port is applied to the communication port. Check the device administrator to ensure the specified port number. Connection in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM, address monitoring and system monitoring are available with one PLC at the same time. However, it is the same Connect Options. 248 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

249 11. Online Connection options for the PLC Using the local USB Perform the following steps to connect using the local USB. 1 On the Online Settings window, select the Connection Type as USB. 2 USB has no detailed setting options. Hence Setting is disabled. 3 Click OK to save the Connection Options. ATTENTION USB device driver has to be installed for the USB to connect to the PLC. Install the USB device driver before attempting to connect to the PLC. The USB driver is automatically installed along with SoftMaster. For more information, refer to Installing SoftMaster. Remote 1 connect setting Connecting using Ethernet Perform the following steps to set the connection to Ethernet. 1 On the Online Settings window, select the Connection Type as Ethernet. 2 Click Setting to specify Ethernet IP. Specify the IP address of the PLC CPU to be connected. 3 Click OK to save the Connection Options. ATTENTION IP is as specified in Ethernet communication module. The connection to PLC CPU can be tested using ping command from PC. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 249 January 2011 Honeywell

250 11. Online Connection options for the PLC Modem connect Perform the following steps to connect using the Modem. 1 On the Online Settings window, select the Connection Type as Modem. 2 Click Setting to specify modem details. The field description for Details > Modem window are as follows: Field Modem Type Port number Baud rate Phone number Station number Description Enter the modem type available to connect. Snet communication module has exclusive modem functions. Enter the modem s communication port. Enter the modem s communication speed. Enter the phone number of the modem if it is a dialup modem. Enter the station number specified in the communication module of Remote 1. RS-232C or USB remote connect Perform the following steps to connect to RS-232C or USB remotely. 1 On the Online Settings window, select the Connection Type as RS- 232C/USB. 2 Select the Depth as Remote 1. 3 Click Settings and click the Remote 1 tab to specify Remote 1 settings. The field description for Details > Remote 1 window are as follows: Field Network type Base number Description Used to specify PLC communication module type for remote connection, Snet, FEnet, and FDEnet are available for the communication modules. Used to specify communication module s base 250 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

251 11. Online Connection options for the PLC number of local PLC base. Slot number Station number IP address Snet channel Used to specify communication module s slot number of local PLC base. Used to input communication module s specified station number of Remote 1. Used to input communication module s specified IP address of Remote 1. Select the connection channel port if the communication module of Remote.1 connection is Snet module. ATTENTION Only if the network type is FEnet, the IP address is active. If not, IP address is inactive with the station number active. Base number of 0~7 and slot number of 0~15 is available. Remote 2 connect setting a) Network type: Used to specify PLC communication module type for remote connection. Snet, FEnet and FDEnet are available for the communication modules. b) Base number: Used to specify communication module s base number of local PLC base. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 251 January 2011 Honeywell

252 11. Online Online functions c) Slot number: Used to specify communication module s slot number of local PLC base. d) Station number: Used to input communication module s specified station Number of Remote 1. e) IP address: Used to input communication module s specified IP address of Remote Online functions Connect This option is used to connect to the PLC based on the specified Connect Options. Perform the following steps to connect to a PLC using a specified connection option. 1 Click Online > Connect. The Connect window displays. 2 If connected to the PLC, the Online menu and Online status displays. 3 If a password has been setup in the PLC, you are prompted to enter the Password. 4 Connection is established if the input password matches the PLC password. ATTENTION If the connection to the PLC is fast, the window may appear and disappear quickly while connecting. After the connection has been established, the PLC s status displays beside the project name on the project window and on the status display line. If any other application program is already connected to the PLC, its main online functions are not available. After the PLC is connected, connecting its cable to another PLC disconnects the previous PLC automatically. When Disconnect is run, Monitor and Debug functions also end. 252 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

253 11. Online Online functions ATTENTION 1. RS-232C Check Points when connection fails. Check if RS-232C cable connection between Computer and PLC is correct. Check if the COM port number of the computer matches with the COM port number where the cable is connected. Check if the RS-232C cable connections are correct. Check if the status of PLC is normal. 2. USB Check if the USB cable connection between the Computer and PLC is correct. Check if the computer identified the PLC as an USB device during the connection. a) Connect the computer and PLC with an USB cable. For additional details, refer to Verifying the USB device driver installation. ATTENTION a) Click Start>Run. b) Enter command in the Run dialog box. c) Run ping test for Ethernet module from the Command Prompt. Type ping <IP address of CPU> and press Enter. If the Ethernet module responds normally, the window shows the communication status. If the Ethernet module does not respond, the window displays the Time out message. Check if the status of PLC is normal. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 253 January 2011 Honeywell

254 11. Online Online functions Write It is used to transfer user programs, parameters, and comments to the PLC. Perform the following steps to transfer user programs, parameters and comment to the PLC. 1 To connect to PLC via Online, click Online > Connect. 2 Click Online > Write. The Write window displays. 3 Select the data to transfer to the PLC and then click OK to start transferring the selected data to PLC. The field description for Write window are as follows: Field Label Selection Tree OK Cancel Description Selects the data to transfer to PLC. Click to transfer the data to PLC. Click to cancel writing of data. a) Displays the current Write/Read item in progress. b) Displays the data size of the item (current item s size/ all items size). c) Displays progressing rate of the current item. d) Displays progressing rate of all items. e) Displays progressing time elapsed until current. f) Cancel: Stops transferring the data. 254 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

255 11. Online Online functions ATTENTION The special module parameter Write is available only when I/O parameter Write is selected. Parameter Write takes more time during CPU RUN than in CPU STOP mode. Read It is used to transfer user programs, parameters, and comments from the PLC to a current project. Perform the following steps to upload the data in PLC and to apply them to a new project. 1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect. 2 Click Online > Read. The Read window displays. 3 Select items to upload from the PLC and click OK. The uploaded items are applied to the current project. A message is displays to confirm that the reading is complete. ATTENTION For field descriptions, refer to Write. Change mode It is used to convert the operation mode of the PLC in operation. Perform the following steps to change the PLC operation mode. 1 To connect to the PLC, click Online > Connect. 2 Click Online > Change Mode > Run/Stop/Debug. 3 PLC operation mode changes as selected by the user. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 255 January 2011 Honeywell

256 11. Online Online functions ATTENTION Ensure that PLC s remote dip switch is ON with the operation mode dip switch as Stop. The program in the PLC must be same to that in the project to convert to Debug mode. If changed from Stop to Run mode, a dialog box confirms the program conversion to an executable code inside the PLC. This dialog box may be visible up to 30s according to the program size. If changed to Run mode, the Performing Initialization Task dialog box appears while the initialization task is run. After the initialization task is complete or disconnected, the dialog box closes. If changed to Run or Debug mode, Run or Debug function may not be normal if any error occurs on the PLC. Delete the PLC error first and then change the operation mode. Compare with PLC If Show Message when changing the PLC mode in the Tool > Option > Online is not selected, the confirmation message is not displayed when Mode Change instruction is run. This function is used to compare the project in the PLC to the project open in SoftMaster. Perform the following steps to compare projects. 1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect. 2 Click Online > Compare with PLC. The Compare with PLC window displays. 3 Select an object to compare and then click Compare. The field description for Compare with PLC window are as follows: Field Current project Compare PLC Description Refers to the project open in SoftMaster. Compares between the selected items. Refers to the project in the PLC. 256 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

257 11. Online Online functions ATTENTION Compare results displays on the Result window. For more details, refer to Comparing projects. Reset PLC This function is used to reset the PLC. Reset PLC is also possible using the Reset PLC dip switch in the CPU module. Perform the following steps to reset the PLC. 1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect. 2 Click Online > Reset PLC. The Reset PLC window displays. 3 Choose to perform a reset or an overall reset and click OK. ATTENTION Reset: when PLC is powered again, it deletes all error/warning information during power ON. Error/warning may occur again based on the situation. Overall reset: when PLC is powered again, it clears error/warning information; latch 1 area data, I/O skip, error mask, and forced I/O setting area to allow power on. Beware of the fact that after reset, the PLC is OFF and then ON again. Clearing PLC data It is used to clear user programs, parameters, comments, memory, and latch area in PLC. To delete the saved data and latch area in PLC, perform the following steps: 1 To connect to PLC, select Online > Connect. 2 Select Online > Clear PLC. The Clear PLC window displays. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 257 January 2011 Honeywell

258 11. Online Online functions 3 Select items to delete and then click Clear to start Clear PLC. 4 Under the Clear Item tab, select items of the project saved in the PLC to be deleted. 5 Click Clear to delete the selected items. 6 Select the Clear Memory tab to clear the selected memory area in the PLC. The field description for Clear PLC window are as follows: Field List of memory areas to select Clear Select All Reset All Description Shows the memory areas in PLC. Start/End address to delete can be specified by the user. Deletes the selected items. Selects all the memory areas. Cancels the selected memory area. PLC information You can view the information regarding the connected PLC. You can also set the password and the PLC timer on the PLC Information window. CPU information This function allows checking the detailed information of the PLC CPU. Perform the following steps to check the detailed information of PLC CPU. 1 To connect to the PLC, click Online > Connect. 2 Click Online > PLC Information. The PLC Information window displays. 3 Select the CPU tab. Shows the specified details and status of the connected PLC CPU. 4 Click Close to close the window. 258 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

259 11. Online Online functions CPU performance SoftMaster enables you to check the scan time of the PLC and memory application status. Perform the following steps to check the scan time and memory application status of PLC. 1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect. 2 Click Online > PLC Information. The PLC Information window displays. 3 Select the Performance tab. The field description for PLC Information > Performance window are as follows: Field Label Scan Time Program Memory used Details Upload Memory used Details Description Shows the Maximum/Minimum/Current scan time of the connected PLC. If Fixed Cycle Operation is set in the basic parameter, it displays the fixed cycle. Shows the downloaded programs size/all PLC program areas size. Shows the list of programs downloaded on the PLC. Shows the downloaded comment s size/all PLC comment areas size. Shows the list of comments saved in the PLC. 4 Click Details to view details of the Program Memory used. The list of all saved programs and their size displays. Password The user password can be specified, changed or deleted to protect PLC information. Perform the following steps to assign, change, and delete the user password. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 259 January 2011 Honeywell

260 11. Online Online functions 1 To connect to the PLC, click Online > Connect. 2 Click Online > PLC Information. The PLC Information window displays. 3 Select the Password tab. The field description for PLC Information > Password window are as follows: Field Current Password New password Confirm password Delete Change Description Used to enter the password saved in the PLC. Used to enter a new password. Used to enter the New Password again. Deletes the password of the PLC. Changes the password of the PLC. Setting password Perform the following steps to set a new password. 1 Enter a new password in New Password field. 2 Enter the new password again in the Confirm password field. 3 Click Change to set the new password in PLC. Changing password Perform the following steps to change an existing password. 1 Enter the password saved in PLC in Current Password field. 2 Enter a new password in New Password field. 3 Enter the new password again in Confirm password field. 260 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

261 11. Online Online functions 4 Click Change to change the password of the PLC. Deleting password Perform the following steps to delete an existing password. 1 Enter the password saved in PLC in Current Password field. 2 Click Clear to delete the PLC password. ATTENTION The password can contain a maximum of eight alphabets. The alphabets can be of upper case or lower case. Special characters can also be used for password. On setting a password for the PLC, you are prompted to enter password when attempting to connect to the PLC. Only after authentication of the password, the connection to the PLC is established. PLC RTC setting It helps to set the RTC (Real Time Clock) of the PLC. Perform the following steps to set the RTC of the PLC. 1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect. 2 Click Online > PLC Information. The PLC Information window displays. 3 Select the PLC RTC tab. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 261 January 2011 Honeywell

262 11. Online Online functions The field description for PLC Information > PLC RTC window are as follows: State Date Time Field Label Synchronize PLC with PC clock Send to PLC Description Shows PLC timer setting status. If the timer is not specified, PLC time is not read. Displays date. Displays time. Synchronizes date and time between PC and PLC. Transfers user-specified time or synchronized time to PLC. PLC history It displays the history data of error/warning, Change Mode and Shut down Log saved in PLC. Error log Perform the following steps to view the error log. 1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect. 2 Click Online > PLC History. The PLC History window displays. 3 Select the Error Log tab. 262 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

263 11. Online Online functions The field description for PLC History > Error Log window are as follows: Field Label Description List Details/Remedy Read All Clear all logs Update Save Clear Close Displays Error Log. Displays details of the error selected from the history along with action to rectify the error. Reads and displays all PLC histories. Deletes all logs entered. Reads PLC history again. Saves PLC history to a file. Deletes PLC history. Closes the window. Mode log It shows the Mode Change Log of PLC operation modes. Perform the following steps to view the Mode log. 1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect. 2 Click Online > PLC History. The PLC History window displays. 3 Select the Mode Log tab. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 263 January 2011 Honeywell

264 11. Online Online functions Shut down log It shows the Shut down Log history of PLC. Perform the following steps to view the Shut down log. 1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect. 2 Click Online > PLC History. The PLC History window displays. 3 Select the Shut Down Log tab. ATTENTION The shut down log also displays the base number where power shut down occurred. System log It shows the history of tasks run by SoftMaster when the PLC is running. Perform the following steps to view the System log. 1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect. 2 Click Online > PLC History. The PLC History window displays. 3 Select the System Log tab. ATTENTION History data is arranged in chronological sequence. The history is saved as.csv file. This file can be opened in MS Excel or other String editing programs. Double-click the first column of the list to change sequence in ascending/descending order. A maximum of 100 history data are displayed. Click Read All to read more PLC histories. If the number of items in history is less than 100, the Read All is disabled. 264 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

265 11. Online Online functions PLC error/warning You can check the error/warning and previous error log currently saved in PLC. Perform the following steps to check the error/warning and previous error logs in the PLC. 1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect. 2 Click Online > PLC Errors/Warnings. The PLC Error/Warning window displays. ATTENTION In case of an error/warning during connection or Online, the Error/Warning window displays. If the error is an I/O parameter issue, I/O installation error, fuse error, I/O Read/Write error, special communication module error, the applicable error s slot information displays. When a Program Error (when the PLC mode is changed from Stop to Run) or Execution Program Error (when PLC is in Run mode) occurs, if the SM project and the downloaded PLC program are same, then double-click the area of program name to move to the corresponding step in the program. Flash memory setting Flash memory operation of PLC can be configured using SoftMaster. When the operation mode of the PLC mode changes to RUN, it runs the program after copying the program in the flash memory to the program memory. In other words, it runs the PLC from the program in the flash memory. PLC operation in Run mode PLC operation in RUN mode refers to the operation mode changes from STOP to RUN, and that the operation mode is Run when PLC is powered ON. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 265 January 2011 Honeywell

266 11. Online Online functions Perform the following steps to view or change the flash memory settings. 1 To connect to PLC, click Online > Connect. 2 Click Online > Set Flash Memory. The Flash Memory Run Mode Setup window displays. The field description for Flash Memory Run Mode Setup window are as follows: Field Label Enable flash memory run mode Disable flash memory run mode Description A program is run from Flash memory. Cancels the flash memory s operation mode. ATTENTION If a flash memory operation mode is specified, the program is copied to the flash memory after Program Write or Modification Write during Run. The flash memory operation mode setting is configured to recover the program when PLC status is in error. Force I/O setting Force I/O of the I/O refresh area can be specified in PLC. To specify a forced I/O and I/O refresh area in PLC: 1 Click Online > Force I/O. The Force I/O Setup window displays. The field description for The Force I/O Setup window are as follows: 266 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

267 11. Online Online functions Field Label Module address Forced Input Forced Output Apply Forced I/O Setting address list Delete Variable Names Delete All Select All OK Cancel Description Used to select an address by using base, slot. Used to enable/disable Forced Input. Forced input value per bit is applicable only when the Forced Input is allowed. Used to enable/disable Forced Output. Forced output value per bit is applicable only when the Forced Output is allowed. Saves the changed items in the PLC without closing the window. Used to specify the flag and data for each bit. Displays the address with the Forced I/O flag or data specified. Deletes the flag and data specified in the selected address from the specified address list. Displays the list of variable/comment. Used to cancel the specified flag and data for all areas. Used to specify the flag and data for all areas. Click to save the changes and to close the window. Click to close the window. ATTENTION Obtaining Forced I/O information, takes around 5s at a speed of bps with RS-232C connected, or about 1s with USB. The flag displays the Forced I/O application status for each bit. If you select the flag, it means Enable, and if you do not select the flag, it means Disable. The data displays the forced value. If selected, 1 is the forced value, R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 267 January 2011 Honeywell

268 11. Online Online functions and if not, 0 is the forced value. However, it is effective only when the flag is in Enable status. Flag Data Forced Value 0 (not selected) 0 (not selected) X 0 (not selected) 1 (selected) X 1 (selected) 0 (not selected) 0 1 (selected) 1 (selected) 1 Click Variable Names to display variables declared on I and Q Address. In case of an output module having less than 64-channels, you can specify the flag and data up to 64 channels. Force I/O setting Example: the 4th bit of Base 0, Slot 0 forced to output value 1, 8th bit to output value 0. 1 Select base 0 and slot 0. 2 Select the flag and data of the bit 3. %QW0.0.0 is registered to the established Address. 3 Select the flag of the bit 7. As the forced output value of the bit 7 is 0, no data needs to be selected. Since %QW0.0.0 is already registered in the pre-set Address, it is not added again. 268 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

269 11. Online Online functions 4 Select the Forced Output Enable Flag and then click Apply to apply the forced value. Forced I/O cancel Example: the 4th, 8th bit of Base0, Slot 0 forced value to cancel. 1 Move to %QW Use the button or directly enter the area to move to. 2 Click the bit 3 and 7 s flag to cancel the forced output value. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 269 January 2011 Honeywell

270 11. Online Online functions 3 Click Apply. ATTENTION In program monitoring, the following are applicable: In the case of forced input, monitoring is displayed with the forced value since the forced input value is updated in the monitor area. In the case of forced output, monitoring is not displayed since the forced value is actually the output regardless of the calculation result. Skip I/O setting Skip is used to enable or disable IO Slots during the PLC operation. Perform the following steps to skip I/O during a PLC operation. 1 Click Online > Skip I/O. The Skip I/O Setup window displays. 270 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

271 11. Online Online functions The field description for Skip I/O Setup window are as follows: Field Label Base Skip I/O Slot Skip I/O Show Existing Base Only Details OK Cancel Description Used to skip the base I/O. If the base module is skipped, all slots in the base are I/O skipped. Used to skip a particular IO. Shows existing base only Displays detailed information of the special module or the communication module. Click to save the changes and to close the window. Click to close the window. Skip I/O setting for each slot Perform the following steps to skip I/O setting for each slot. 1 Select the base with the slot to specify Skip I/O. 2 Select the slot to specify the Skip I/O. 3 Select the check box corresponding to the module. Observe that * appears beside the base. 4 Click Yes to display the changed values. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 271 January 2011 Honeywell

272 11. Online Online functions Skip I/O cancel for each slot Perform the following steps to cancel skip I/O for a slot. 1 Select the base to cancel the Skip I/O. 2 Select the slot to cancel the Skip I/O. 3 Clear the check box corresponding to the module. Observe that the * mark beside the base disappears if there is no slot where Skip I/O is specified in the applicable base. Base skip I/O setting Perform the following steps to set base skip I/O. 1 Select the base to specify the base Skip I/O. 2 Select the check box corresponding to the module. 3 Click OK. The changed values displays. 4 Click Yes to display changed values. Base skip I/O cancel Perform the following steps to cancel the base skip I/O. 1 Select the base to cancel the base Skip I/O. 2 Clear the check box corresponding to the selected module. As the base Skip I/O is cancelled, the Skip I/O for each slot can be specified or cancelled. 3 Click OK to apply the specified Skip I/O. 4 Click Yes to display the changed values. 272 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

273 11. Online Online functions Fault mask It is used to configure whether the module must be run in Fault during PLC operation. Perform the following steps to view fault mask setting. 1 Click Online > Fault Mask. The Fault Mask Setup window displays. The field description for Fault Mask Setup window are as follows: Field Label Base Fault Mask Slot Fault Mask Show Existing Base Only Details OK Cancel Description Used to apply base fault mask. If the base module s mask is specified, all slots in the base are of the fault mask. Used to apply the fault mask for each slot. Shows existing base only. Displays detailed information about the special module or the communication module. Click to save the changes and to close the dialog box. Click to close the window. ATTENTION Canceling the Fault Mask specified is identical as described in Skip I/O setting. For more details, refer to Skip I/O setting. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 273 January 2011 Honeywell

274 11. Online Online functions ATTENTION The I/O Information window which is similar to Fault Mask or I/O skip window when Online > I/O Information is selected. I/O Sync. is activated only when the PLC is in STOP Mode. Click I/O Sync to synchronize the I/O Parameter of SoftMaster project with the real module installation information. Be careful since the previous I/O parameter will be erased. 274 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

275 11. Online Module changing wizard 11.3 Module changing wizard This wizard is used to change the module while the PLC is in RUN mode. Perform the following steps to change the module during PLC operation. 1 Click Online > Module Changing Wizard. The Selecting Module window displays. The field description for Selecting Module window are as follows: Field Label Comment Base Module Tree Slot Modules List Back Next Cancel Description Displays the comment of the module selection stage. Displays the base module. Displays the information of the slot installed on the base module. It is inactive while you select the module. Used to move to the module selection stage. It is active only if you select a module to change. Used to move to the module confirming stage. Closes the Module Changing Wizard. 2 Select the module to change and then click Next. The Checking Module window displays. The field description for Checking Module window are as follows: Field Label Comment Module Information Back Next Cancel Description Displays the comment of the module confirming stage. Displays detailed information of the selected module. Used to move to the module selection stage. Used to move to the module removing stage. Closes the Module Changing Wizard. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 275 January 2011 Honeywell

276 11. Online Module changing wizard 3 Check the module to change. 4 Click Next, Remove Module window displays if the information displayed is identical to the module to change. Click Back to go back to the previous stage or click Cancel to cancel the Module Changing Wizard. The field description for Removing Module window are as follows: Field Label Comment Back Next Cancel Description Displays the comment of the removing module stage. Used to move to the confirming stage of the module removal. Used to move to the module installation stage. Closes the Module Changing Wizard. 5 Remove the module physically. 6 After removing the module, click Next, the Changing Module Finished window displays. Click Back to move back to the previous stage or click Cancel to cancel the Module Changing Wizard. 7 Install the module at the module installation stage. The field description for Changing Module Finished window are as follows: Field Label Description Back Finish Description Displays the comment of the module change complete stage. It is inactive since going back to previous stage is unavailable after the module changed. Finishes the Module Changing Wizard. 8 After inserting the module, click Next. Click Back to move back to the previous stage or click Cancel to cancel the Module Changing Wizard. 9 Close the Module Changing Wizard. 276 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

277 11. Online Module changing wizard ATTENTION During Module removal using the wizard, if the module is not removed, an error message appears. During Module installation using the wizard, if the module is not installed, an error message appears. ATTENTION If the Module Changing Wizard is cancelled, Fault Mask and Skip I/O may continue to be active. Activate the Fault mask and Skip I/O to operate the module again. ATTENTION To change the module without using the wizard, perform the following steps: 1. Set the Skip I/O for the module to change. 2. Set the Fault Mask for the module to change. 3. Remove the module from the PLC. 4. Install a new module. 5. Release the Skip I/O for the applicable module. 6. Click Online > PLC Error/Warning to check for any error on the applicable module. 7. If no error is found on the applicable module, release the Fault Mask for the module. REFERENCE - INTERNAL For additional information on Skip I/O and Fault Mask specified for the module, refer to Skip I/O setting and Fault mask. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 277 January 2011 Honeywell

278 11. Online Module changing wizard 278 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

279 12.1 Monitoring 12. Monitoring SoftMaster s monitoring functions include: Start/Stop Monitoring, Pause, Resume, Pausing Conditions, and Change Current Value. Start/stop monitoring Perform the following steps to start/stop monitoring. 1 Click Online > Connect for on-line connection to PLC. 2 Click Monitor > Start Monitoring to start monitoring. Click Monitor > Stop Monitoring to stop monitoring. 3 If LD or IL program is active, it goes to monitoring mode. ATTENTION When monitoring starts, correct value may not be monitored, if PLC program and SoftMaster program are different. Change current value Selected address s current value or forced I/O setting can be changed during monitoring. Perform the following steps to change current value for a selected address. 1 Click Online > Connect for on-line connection to PLC. 2 Click Monitor > Start Monitoring to start monitoring. 3 Select address or variable on the program or variable monitoring window. 4 Click Monitor > Change Current Value. The Change Current Value window displays. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 279 January 2011 Honeywell

280 12. Monitoring Monitoring The field description for Change Current Value window are as follows: Field Label Address Type Range Value On/Off Value Forced I/O Flag OK Data Description Name of the variable where current value is changed. Type of the variable where current value is changed. Available range of current value based on type. Device On/Off specified if its type is BOOL. Variable value specified if its type is not BOOL. Forced I/O setting available if variable is I/Q area and BOOL type. It is used for Forced I/O setting. It is used to transfer setting value to PLC. Forced I/O data value is specified. 5 Enter Current Value in the window and click OK to change the current value. 280 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

281 12. Monitoring Monitoring ATTENTION 1. The default value is displayed based on the variable s display type. In other words, if it is displayed in hexadecimal when monitored, current value changes to hexadecimal. 2. The value may not be entered according to its display type. In other words, if displayed in hexadecimal, it can be entered as unsigned decimal. 3. When you click OK, an error may occur due to ineffective input value or range exceedance. 4. Hexadecimal input starts with 16# shown in 16# As for string type, current value (String) is entered between single quotation marks ( abcde ). 6. In case of WSTRING type, enter the current value (string) between double quotation marks ( abcde ). 7. Only if variable is I/Q address and BOOL type, compulsory I/O is active. 8. If forced I/O is inactive, edit feature of current value and ON/OFF setting is inactive. 9. Change Current Value and Forced I/O Setting are not run at a time. REFERENCE - INTERNAL For additional information, refer to Force I/O setting. Pause/restart monitoring You can pause and restart monitoring. Pause monitoring Perform the following steps to pause monitoring. 1 Click Online > Connect for on-line connection to PLC. 2 Click Monitor > Start Monitoring to start monitoring. 3 Click Monitor > Pause to stop monitoring momentarily. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 281 January 2011 Honeywell

282 12. Monitoring Monitoring Restart monitoring Perform the following steps to restart monitoring. Select Monitor > Resume to restart monitoring. ATTENTION PLC is in RUN mode, even if monitoring is momentarily stopped. You can only restart paused monitoring. Monitoring value is not renewed if the program window is moved with Pause Monitoring. If the current value is changed with Pause Monitoring, the PLC value changes but monitoring value of program window is not renewed. Pausing conditions If a specified address meets the set conditions, monitoring is paused. Perform the following steps to set the pausing conditions. 1 Click Monitor > Pausing Conditions. The Pausing Conditions window displays. 2 Specify address on Pausing Conditions window. 282 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

283 12. Monitoring Monitoring The field descriptions for Pausing Conditions window are as follows: Field Label Select All Use Program Reset All Variable Condition Set value Type Comment Find OK Cancel Description Used to check all items with no error to allow on the list. Used to check setting status of Pause Monitoring. Selects a program name. Used to cancel all the selected items allowed. Used to enter variable name to stop monitoring momentarily. Used to select conditions to stop monitoring momentarily. Used to enter condition value to stop monitoring momentarily. Displays a variable type. Used to display description declared in variable. Used to find the variable to stop monitoring momentarily on variable list of a selected program. Click to save details and to close the window. Click to close window without saving the details. 3 Click OK to save details. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 283 January 2011 Honeywell

284 12. Monitoring LD program monitoring ATTENTION A maximum of ten conditions can be set to pause monitoring. When you click OK, the items in error are not saved. Errors are displayed in pink. String type does not support the function of pause monitoring. Among the five conditions [==, >, <, >=, <=] available for pause monitoring, you can select one LD program monitoring When the SoftMaster is in monitoring mode, it displays contact points prepared in the Ladder program (normally open contact point, normally closed contact point, positive transition pulse contact point, negative transition pulse contact point), coils (coil, reversecoil, set coil, reset coil, positive transition pulse coil, negative transition pulse coil) and function (block) I/O parameter s current value. Perform the following steps to start monitoring. 1 Click Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring. 2 LD program changes to monitoring mode. 3 Click Monitor > Change Current Value to change current value. Monitor display of contact point 1. Normally open contact point: If an applicable contact point s value is on status, address (or variable) value displays in red, and the power flow inside the contact point in blue. ATTENTION Monitor-related colors indicated in this user s guide are the default colors of SoftMaster. Applicable colors may be changed using Tools > Options. For more details on the option item, refer to Basic application. 284 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

285 12. Monitoring Variable monitoring 2. Normally closed contact point: If applicable contact point s value is on status, address value is displays in red, and the power flow inside the contact point is not displayed. 3. Normally transition pulse contact point: displayed similar to as normally open contact point. 4. Normally transition pulse contact point: displayed similar to as normally closed contact point. Coil monitor display 1. Coil: If applicable coil s value is On status, address (or variable) value displays in red, and the power flow inside the coil in blue. 2. Reverse-coil: If applicable coil s value is On status, address (or variable) value is displays in red, and the power flow inside the coil is not displayed. 3. Set coil: displays as similar to coil. 4. Reset coil: displays as similar to (negative) coil. 5. Positive transition pulse coil: displays as similar to coil. 6. Negative transition pulse coil: displays as similar to coil. Monitor display of function (block) Monitoring value is displayed on the IO parameter of the function (block). The data of the function (block) IO parameter is displayed based on the monitoring display format. ATTENTION Data display can be customized using Tools > Options > Online. For details, refer to Basic application. Start/stop monitoring Stop monitoring Click Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 285 January 2011 Honeywell

286 12. Monitoring Variable monitoring ATTENTION When monitoring, all types of Edit is unavailable except Modification during Run Mode. When monitoring starts and stops, LD diagram height changes to display application instruction s current value, which takes some time according to the size of prepared program Variable monitoring Monitoring is available through specific registered variables. The field descriptions of Variable Monitoring Window are as follows: Field Label Description PLC Program Variable Name/ Address Value Type Address/Variable Name Comment Error Display Used to display PLC available for registration. A SoftMaster project is composed of multi-plc. Accordingly, it is displayed on the variable monitoring window. Used to select a program name with a variable to register. Used to enter the name of a variable or address. Used to display applicable address value when monitored. The value can be changed through Change Current Value of monitoring. Displays the type of variable. Press Enter or double-click an assigned address or variable name to select a variable on the list of local variables if memory is allocated. Displays the variable comment. Error displays in red. 286 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

287 12. Monitoring Variable monitoring Field Label Error Type Error type: Description In case one of PLC name, address and type is not entered. In case of incorrect address. In case there is no program name or there is no program in the PLC. In case the address type is not supported or PLC name unavailable. ATTENTION The areas of type, address/variable and comment column cannot be edited by user. You cannot monitor four variable monitoring tabs at the same time. The number of addresses available to register in variable monitoring is unlimited. Only the part displayed on the window is monitored. The larger the number of addresses, the longer the monitoring refresh takes. Even if not in monitoring mode, refresh is available on variable monitoring window. Registering variable/comment Monitoring items can be registered on local variable list on the variable monitoring window. Perform the following steps to register in variable/comment. 1 On the monitoring window, right-click and select Register in Variable/Comment from the context menu. 2 The Select dialog box appears, if two or more PLCs are included in the project or if two or more programs are included in a PLC. Select the PLC and program to register. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 287 January 2011 Honeywell

288 12. Monitoring Variable monitoring 3 Click OK. The Select Variable window displays. The field description of Select Variable window are as follows: Field Label Description Variable Variable type Variable List OK Used to enter variable names to find. Displays variables by types. Used to display the list of variables. Used to register selected items on the varia monitoring window. ATTENTION You can select one or more items on Select Variable/Address window. The selected item is added in the last line of the variable monitoring window. An item same as a previously registered item can be also registered. Register all You can register all direct variables at the same time. Perform the following steps to register all variables. 1 On the variable monitoring window, right-click the mouse and select Register All from the context menu. 2 The Select dialog box appears, if two or more PLCs are included in the project. Select a PLC and program to register. 3 Click OK. The Register All window displays. 288 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

289 12. Monitoring Variable monitoring The field description for Register All window are as follows: Field label Start Address Count Description Used to input start address of the address to register. (Address Ex: IX0.0.0, QB MW12 ) Used to enter the number of registers. 4 The variable registration screen displays. ATTENTION A maximum of 100 variables can be registered at a time. The item to register is added at the last line of the variable monitoring window. Register by user The user can directly enter items to register on the variable monitoring window. You can directly edit the PLC, Program, and Variable/Address Column. ATTENTION Copy, Paste, Cut, and Delete functions are provided. Copy: available in String format on the variable monitoring windows. Paste is available for Excel and other String editors. Paste: Paste is available for variable monitoring after Copy from Excel or other String editors. Delete: used to delete the selected row. Delete is also applicable for several selected rows. Undo or Redo functions are not supported. Drag and drop register from other windows The user can select contact point, coil, variable, and so on from other windows (LD, Variable/Comment window) to drag and drop on the variable monitoring window for registering. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 289 January 2011 Honeywell

290 12. Monitoring Variable monitoring Perform the following steps to drag and drop area to register from other windows. 1 Select the area from other windows (LD, SFC, Variable/Comment window) to register on the variable monitoring. Area to register onto the variable monitoring from LD window Red Edge. Area to register onto the variable monitor from SFC window. Area to register onto the variable monitoring window from Variable/Comment window. 2 Move to the variable monitoring window, press and hold the mouse s left button on the selected area. Cursor shape and input image is created onto the variable monitoring window as shown in the following figure. 3 Release the mouse button after positioning on the row of the variable monitoring window to insert the selected items. 290 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

291 12. Monitoring Variable monitoring 4 The selected items are registered on the variable monitoring window as shown in the following figure. ATTENTION The variable registering time is directly proportional to the number of variables to be registered. There is no limit on the number of variables that can be registered. Items inserted in the middle of rows, are registered between rows. Press and hold mouse s left button and move onto variable monitoring number tabs (Monitoring 1, Monitoring 2, Monitoring 3, and Monitoring 4) to register on the applicable variable monitoring tabs. View detailed/briefly This function enables to view as many variables as possible on the variable monitoring window. Perform the following steps to view detailed/briefly. 1 On the variable monitoring window, right-click and select Briefly. The following window displays. Only the columns of variable/address and value displays. 2 Select Detailed to display the following window containing many rows. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 291 January 2011 Honeywell

292 12. Monitoring Variable monitoring ATTENTION Selecting Briefly hides the PLC, Program, Type, Address/Variable, and Comment columns. Even when in Brief View mode, the hidden columns can be viewed through View function. The number of rows is decided by the size of the variable monitoring window. In Brief View mode, the number of rows change if the size of the Variable Monitoring Window changes. Even if in Brief View mode, Register, Delete and Edit functions are all available. However, Undo and Redo functions are not supported. Tool tips display PLC, Type and Address only. However, the variable if declared also displays. View options The user can select specific columns. Perform the following steps to view a selected function. 1 On the variable monitoring window, right-click and select View Option > Column Name (PLC, Program, Variable/Address, Value, Address/Variable, Comment) from the context menu. 2 To hide the selected column, right-click and select the same menu again. 292 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

293 12. Monitoring Variable monitoring Display ATTENTION By default, all view option columns are displayed. This function is also available in Detailed View mode. The value column does not support Hide function. If converted to Detailed or Brief View mode, hidden columns are displayed by default. String in the hidden columns cannot be copied and pasted in other editors. The display of the monitoring value of the address registered on the variable monitoring can be changed. Perform the following steps to change the display type of an address. 1 On the variable monitoring window, right-click and select Unsigned Decimal, Signed Decimal, Hexadecimal, and String. 2 The display type of the selected address changes. ATTENTION BOOL type if viewed in unsigned decimal is displayed as On/Off. Hexadecimal is displayed with small letter prefix 16# as shown in 16#h10AC. String is displayed in, for example, adcd. Can set different type than defined in the monitoring option for LD. Display menus are active or inactive based on available display type. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 293 January 2011 Honeywell

294 12. Monitoring Variable monitoring Monitoring operations Start monitoring It is used to begin monitoring of the registered addresses on the variable monitoring window. Perform the following steps to start monitoring. 1 Click Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring. 2 Displays item with identical Start Monitoring PLC name and the item with no error execute Monitoring. Variable Monitoring Window In monitoring mode. ATTENTION PLC s address value is not displayed, if not monitored. Any item with error is not monitored. Edit, Add, and Delete are available even during monitoring. Change current value Current value of the address can be changed in the monitoring mode. Perform the following steps to change the current value of the address in monitoring mode. 1 Click Monitor > Start/Stop Monitoring. 2 Select Address. 3 Click Monitor > Change Current Value. Double-click the address selected 294 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

295 12. Monitoring Variable monitoring on the variable monitoring window or press Enter. 4 The Change Current Value window displays, enabling you to directly enter the current value. 5 Click OK to transfer the setting value to the PLC. Find Find It is used to find a string based on the classification by capital/small letter. ATTENTION Find and Replace function is not available on the variable monitoring window. Value is regarded as a string not as a figure when Find function is run in the value column. Find again It is used to find the string found before once again. Initiate the Find command on the program or Variable/Comment, and then initiate Find Again on the variable monitoring to start find. Print It prints the current active variable monitoring tab contents. ATTENTION Hidden columns are not printed. Print Preview function is not available. Alignment Alignment can be changed to ascending or descending sequence. Perform the following steps to change the alignment. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 295 January 2011 Honeywell

296 12. Monitoring System monitoring 1 Double-click on the header of the column to align. 2 Alignment changes to ascending or descending sequence. 3 After alignment, an arrow figure indicates the sequence as ascending or descending. ATTENTION If aligned in descending sequence, a downward arrow displays. An upward arrow indicates the ascending sequence. By default, it is not aligned when the project is opened. If aligned once more in descending sequence, it is aligned in ascending sequence. Alignment for row is not available System monitoring System Monitoring is used to display the PLC s slot information, assigned I/O information, module status, and data value. Basic application System Monitoring can be initiated in the following two ways: Click Monitor > System Monitoring. Click Start > Program >SoftMaster > System Monitoring. 296 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

297 12. Monitoring System monitoring The Module Information window displays the information of the PLC slot. After reading the module information saved in the PLC, it displays it on the data display screen of the module information window. Select one of the following options view the Base. 1 Select items on the module information window (Example: Base 0, Base 1 ) 2 Select Base items (First, Previous, Next, and Last) 3 Use the direction key on the keyboard to position the module s cursor on the base to select. ATTENTION To start System Monitoring, the SoftMaster must be Online with the PLC and the Monitoring must be ON. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 297 January 2011 Honeywell

298 12. Monitoring System monitoring Connect/disconnect System Monitoring is initiated from SoftMaster, it can also be initiated independently. Thus, the connection is available to PLC with Connect options. If connected with PLC, base information is read from PLC to display on the module information window. Perform the following steps to connect/disconnect system monitoring to PLC. 1 Specify Connect options. 2 Confirm that the cable is installed as applicable to the connection method. 3 Click PLC > Connect to connect. 4 Click PLC > Disconnect to disconnect. ATTENTION System synchronization System Monitoring when initiated connects to the saved Connect options. If run in SoftMaster, it connects to SoftMaster s Connect options. Default of Base 0 displays on the screen. It reads base information, I/O assignment method, and slot information specified in the PLC to display on the window. When monitored, it reads I/O skip information and forced I/O input/output information to change the current value. Perform the following steps for system synchronization. 1 Confirm the connection status with PLC. 2 Click PLC > System Synchronization. ATTENTION Executing system synchronization updates only the module information. For details on I/O assignment method, refer to Basic parameter. 298 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

299 12. Monitoring System monitoring All I/O modules ON/OFF It is used to check output value of all the I/O modules on the PLC. All I/O modules ON It turns the data value of all the I/O modules on the PLC as ON. Perform the following steps to turn ON the data modules. 1 Confirm the connection status with PLC. 2 Click PLC > All I/O modules ON. All I/O modules OFF It makes the data value of all the I/O modules on the PLC as OFF. Perform the following steps to turn OFF all I/O modules. 1 Confirm the connection status with PLC. 2 Click PLC > All I/O modules OFF. Selected I/O modules ON/OFF It is used to check the output value of the selected I/O modules on the PLC. Selected I/O module ON All I/Os selected are forced to ON. Perform the following steps to turn ON a selected I/O module. 1 Confirm the connection status with PLC. 2 Click PLC > Selected I/O modules ON. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 299 January 2011 Honeywell

300 12. Monitoring System monitoring Selected I/O module OFF All I/Os selected are forced to OFF. Perform the following steps to turn OFF a selected I/O module. 1 Confirm the connection status with PLC. 2 Click PLC > Selected I/O modules OFF. Change current value To change the current value, the SoftMaster must be connected to the PLC and be in the monitoring mode. Click the contact point to change the data value of the selected contact point to ON or OFF. Perform the following steps to change the current value of a selected contact point. 1 Ensure that the PLC is online and the monitoring mode is enabled. 2 Position the mouse cursor on the I/O module s contact point to change the cursor to hand shape. 3 Click the I/O module s contact point. ATTENTION Move the mouse to the I/O contact point to display the assigned address on the status bar (located on the bottom-right of the window). If I/O skip is specified, it is always displays as OFF. Information display of power module Information of Power Module displays base power shutdown history including date, time, and details in which power shutdown bases are displayed. 300 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

301 12. Monitoring System monitoring Perform the following steps to display the information of a power module. 1 Confirm the connection status with PLC. 2 Select one of the following methods to display module information: Select the Power Module and select PLC > Module Info. Select the Power Module and right-click and select Module Info. from the context menu. Select the Power Module on the window and press Enter. Select and double-click on the Power Module displayed on the window. The Power Down History Information window displays. ATTENTION A maximum of 100 power shutdowns displays on the window. No module information is available for empty slots and I/O modules. Information display of CPU module CPU Module Information displays the CPU version, type, operation mode, key status, CPU status, connection status, mode conversion source, forced I/O setting status, I/O skip, and fault mask status. Perform the following steps to display the information of a CPU module. 1 Confirm the connection status with PLC. 2 Select one of the following methods to display the CPU module information. Select the CPU Module and select PLC > Module Info. Select the CPU Module on the Module Information window, and right-click and select CPU Module Info. from the context menu. Select the CPU Module on the window and press Enter. Select and double-click on the CPU Module displayed on the window. The CPU Module Information window displays. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 301 January 2011 Honeywell

302 12. Monitoring System monitoring Information display of communication module Communication Module Information displays module type, operation mode, hardware error and hardware version, O/S version and its installed date. Perform the following steps to display the information of a communication module. 1 Confirm the connection status with PLC. 2 Select one of the following methods to display the COM module information. Select Communication Module and select PLC > Module Info. Select Communication Module on the Module Information window, rightclick and select Connection Module Info. from the context menu. Select Communication Module on the window and press Enter. Select and double-click on Communication Module displayed on the window. The Communication Module Information window displays. Viewing information of special modules Special Module Information displays the module name, O/S version and date and module status. Perform the following steps to display the information of a special module. 1 Confirm the connection status with PLC. 2 Select one of the following methods to display special module information: Select the Special Module and select PLC > Module Information. Select a Special Module on the Module Information window and right-click and select Special Module Info. from the context menu. Select a Special Module on the screen and press Enter. Double-click a Special Module displayed on the screen. The Special Module Information window displays. 302 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

303 12. Monitoring System monitoring Classification Module name O/S version O/S date Module status Description Provides special module s type and its detailed information. Provides special module s installed O/S version information, which is used for upgrading module O/S later. Provides special module s latest O/S updated date information. Provides special module s current status (error code) information. Start/stop monitoring It reads PLC s I/O data to display on the window. Start monitoring Perform the following steps to start monitoring. 1 Confirm the connection status with PLC. 2 Click PLC > Start Monitoring. Stop monitoring Perform the following steps to stop monitoring. 1 Confirm the connection status with PLC. 2 Click PLC > Stop Monitoring. Special module monitoring It initiates monitoring the special module (A/D module, D/A module, HS counter module). Perform the following steps to run special module monitoring. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 303 January 2011 Honeywell

304 12. Monitoring System monitoring 1 Confirm the connection status with PLC. 2 Click PLC > Special Module Monitoring. The Special Module Monitor window displays. ATTENTION Positioning module does not support PLC's module monitoring. Positioning module s monitoring function is installed along with its exclusive software to monitor. Save It is used to save the system information and data currently displayed on the window. Perform the following steps to save the data and system information: 1 Click File > Save. 2 Click File > Save As to save the data in a different file name. ATTENTION File extension is set as (.smi). Open It is used to read the system information file previously saved. To open a file: Disconnect from PLC. Click File > Open. Double-click an applicable file name. Drag and drop the file onto the System Monitoring to open it. 304 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

305 12. Monitoring Address monitoring Navigate base It selects a base to show its module information. Perform the following steps to navigate to the first, previous, next, and last base. 1 Navigate to the first base: On the menu, click Base > First Base. 2 Navigate to the previous base: On the menu, click Base > Previous Base. 3 Navigate to the next base: On the menu, click Base > Next Base. 4 Navigate to the last base: On the menu, click Base > Last Base. Print preview This function is used to see a print preview of system monitoring. On the Preview window, the user can modify the area to be printed. Perform the following steps for a preview before printing. 1 On the menu, click PLC > Disconnect. 2 On the System Monitoring window, click File > Preview. 3 Modify the area of the image displayed. 4 Move the mouse to the edge. 5 Move the mouse while being clicked to modify the size. ATTENTION The specified area of Preview is saved. In monitoring mode, Preview is not available. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 305 January 2011 Honeywell

306 12. Monitoring Address monitoring 12.5 Address monitoring Address Monitoring enables the monitoring of all the address areas data in the PLC. It can write or read data value on the PLC s specific address. In addition, Address Monitoring can display the data value continuously when displayed or entered on the window depending on the bit format and display method. Basic application Address Monitoring is performed by the following two ways: On the SoftMaster menu, click Monitor > Address Monitoring. On the Start menu, click Program > SoftMaster > Address Monitoring. The address information window displays all the address areas in the PLC, based on CPU type. Double-click the address icon (Example: I. Q, M, R, W) or right-click on the Address Tree window and choose Open Address from the context menu. 306 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

307 12. Monitoring Address monitoring ATTENTION To start address monitoring, SoftMaster must be Online with PLC and the monitoring must be ON. If monitoring mode is OFF, the address displays the previous data value. The data value is initialized to 0. Address areas Address areas are necessary for effective and correct control of various types of data. PLC provides various address areas of data to manage the data effectively. REFERENCE - INTERNAL For additional information on the respective detailed address area, refer to 2MLI CPUU User s Guide. Data format and display items Data is displayed on the window in the following ways: Display Setting Description Data Size Display Format 1 bit, 8 bits, 16 bits, 32 bits, and 64 bits Binary, BCD, Unsigned decimal, Signed decimal, Hexadecimal, Real, String 1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, and 64 bit Data size of the address is displayed in 1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, or 64 bit To display the data size of the address in 1 bit, 8 bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, or 64 bit: Click View > View Options >1 bit/8 bit/16 bit/32 bit/64 bit from the menu of the Address Monitoring window. ATTENTION The address of a selected cell is displayed in the task bar. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 307 January 2011 Honeywell

308 12. Monitoring Address monitoring Binary, BCD, unsigned decimal, signed decimal, hexadecimal, real, and text Edit data Edit cell Address data can also be displayed in binary, BCD, unsigned decimal, signed decimal, hexadecimal, real, and text format by choosing the appropriate View option. Data value is specified to write address data on the PLC, or to write the selected area on the PLC. It is used to edit data in the cell. Perform the following steps to edit data in the cell: 1 Use the mouse or keyboard to select an optional cell. 2 If in monitoring mode, data can be directly entered in the selected cell. If monitoring is off, double-click the bottom right of the cell to open a dialog box to enter the data. Cut, copy, paste, delete data You can Cut, Copy, Paste, and delete data from the cell. This works like the standard windows functions. Fill It is used to fill the selected data. Perform the following steps to fill a selected area. 1 Use the mouse to select the cell area to fill automatically. 2 Position the mouse at the end of the cell to make the mouse cursor shape as +. 3 Move the mouse with its left button pressed up/down and right/left. 4 Release the left button of the mouse. 308 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

309 12. Monitoring Address monitoring Save address Use one of the following three methods to save the address. Save all address areas To save all address areas: 1 Click File > Save. 2 Click File > Save As to save the data with a different file name. File extension is set as (.mem). Save respective address area To save a respective address area: 1 Click File > Export Address to File. File extension is set as (address+m). (Example: iim, iqm, imm, ) Save respective address area with all windows closed To save a respective address area in case if all windows are closed. 1 Click File > Export Address to File. 2 Select the address to save from the list. File extension is set as (i+device+m). (Example: iim, iqm, imm, ) Open address Use one of the following three methods available to open an address. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 309 January 2011 Honeywell

310 12. Monitoring Address monitoring Open all address areas To open all address areas: Select File > Open. Import address from file To import an address from file: Click File > Import Address from File. Open respective address area with all windows closed To open a respective address area in case of all windows closed: Click File > Import Address from File. Select the address to open from the list. ATTENTION When in monitoring mode, Open and Import Address from File are inactive. Data value setting Data value of the address is specified according to its display type and the number of bits. In addition, you can select setting area of the data value. Perform the following steps to set the data value: Stop monitoring. Select Edit > Fill Data Area. The Fill Data Area window displays. The field descriptions for Fill Data Area window are as follows: Field Label Title bar Data value Bit value Description Used to display the address to set its data value. Used to enter and display the data compatible with the number of bits and the display format. Used to decide the size of data. 310 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

311 12. Monitoring Address monitoring Field Label Setup area Display Description Used to decide the range of the data value applied to in the address. Used to decide the input format of data and change format of the data value accordingly if any data value is available. ATTENTION Address name is displayed on the title to display Setting Data Value. Clear data It is used to delete all data values of the address. Perform the following steps to delete all the data values of an address. 1 Click Edit > Clear Data. 2 You are prompted to confirm the deletion of all address areas. Write to PLC It is used to transfer the address data saved in online computer to PLC. Perform the following steps to write a saved address data to PLC. 1 Ensure PLC is connected and the monitoring mode is inactive. 2 Click PLC > Write to PLC. The Write to PLC window displays. 3 Select the address to write on Write of PLC window. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 311 January 2011 Honeywell

312 12. Monitoring Address monitoring The field descriptions for Write to PLC window are as follows: Field Label Address Area Select All Unselect All Description Used to display the list of the addresses to write on PLC. Used to select all the addresses in the address area. Used to cancel all the addresses selected in the address area. 4 Click OK to write the selected address on the PLC. ATTENTION F address s exclusive Read areas cannot be written on PLC. Exclusive read areas are based on the type of CPU. Read from PLC It is used to read the address data saved in PLC to online computer. Perform the following steps to read a saved address data from PLC. 1 Ensure PLC is connected and is in the monitoring mode. 2 Click PLC > Read from PLC. The Read from PLC window displays. 3 Select the address to read from Read from PLC window. The field descriptions for Read from PLC window are as follows: Field Label Address Area Select All Unselect All Description Used to display the list of the addresses to read from PLC. Used to select all the addresses in the address area. Used to cancel all the addresses selected in the address area. 312 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

313 12. Monitoring Address monitoring 4 Click OK to read the selected address from the PLC. Write selected area on PLC It is used to write the address data in the selected area on PLC connected. Perform the following steps to write the address data of a selected area to PLC. 1 Select the area to write on PLC. 2 Click PLC > Write Selected Area to PLC. 3 A confirmation message displays. You are prompted to confirm if you want to write the selected area on the PLC. 4 Click Yes to write the selected area on PLC. Start/stop monitoring It reads the address data from PLC to display on the window in the online status, or it stops reading the data. Start monitoring It reads the address data from PLC to display on the window in the online status. Perform the following steps to start monitoring. 1 Confirm the connection status with PLC. 2 Click PLC > Start Monitoring. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 313 January 2011 Honeywell

314 12. Monitoring Address monitoring Stop monitoring It stops reading the address data from PLC in the on-line status. Perform the following steps to stop monitoring. 1 Confirm the connection status with PLC. 2 Click PLC > Stop Monitoring. ATTENTION If in monitoring mode, the data cannot be edited. If in monitoring mode, Write to PLC, Read from PLC, Write Selected Area to PLC are not available. Change current value It is used to change the data value of the cell in monitoring mode. Perform the following steps to change the data value of a cell in monitoring mode. 1 Ensure PLC is connected and the monitoring mode is active. 2 Click PLC > Change Current Value. The Change Current Value window displays. The field descriptions for Change Current Value window are as follows: Field Label Address Bit number Description Used to display the start address to change the current value. Used to display the number of bits to change the current value. Usually it is identical to 1, 8, 16, 32 or 64 bits as displayed on the window. String format is displayed in 32 8 bits. Display Used to display the data display format to change the current value. 314 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

315 12. Monitoring Address monitoring Set Value Used to display the data value to change the current value. ATTENTION If the current value is changed in string display format, the data value of 32- byte area is always changed from the start address. PLC type settings It is used to display the PLC type currently set or to set address data based on the PLC type. To view or change the PLC type settings: Select File > PLC Type Settings. The PLC Type Setting window displays. The field descriptions for PLC Type Setting window are as follows: Field Label Description PLC Type CPU Type Used to display or change the PLC type currently set. Displays the currently set CPU type or changes the CPU type. ATTENTION While connected to the PLC, the current PLC type displays but is not changeable. Screen zoom-in/zoom-out It is used to zoom in or out the size of the screen displayed. To zoom-in, click View > Zoom-In. To zoom-out, click View > Zoom-Out. Automatic width/height adjustment This function is used to adjust the size of the data values to display on the window. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 315 January 2011 Honeywell

316 12. Monitoring Address monitoring Width AutoFit adjusts the size to the string length of the cell. Automatic Height Adjustment adjusts the row height to the string height of the cell. To auto-fit width adjustment, click View > Width Auto-Fit. To auto-fit height adjustment, click View > Height Auto-Fit. View properties It is used to change the font and font size of the data value displayed on the window. In addition, the color of the data value can be changed in the monitoring mode. Perform the following steps to view the properties of data value. 1 Click View > View Properties. The View Setting window displays. 2 Select Font to change font. 3 Select Color to change color. The field descriptions for View Setting window are as follows: Field Label Font Type, Font size Font Data value color Color Description Shows currently displayed font name and font size. Invokes a dialog box to change font name and font size displayed on the window. Displays color of data value currently specified in monitoring mode. Invokes a dialog box to change color of data value in monitoring mode. 4 Click OK to apply the newly specified value. Page setting It is used to specify the address page printed. Page margins, title, and grid lines can be shown or hidden as necessary. In addition, the sequence of pages to print can be specified with priority of row or column. Perform the following steps to view or change the page settings. 316 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

317 12. Monitoring Special module monitoring 1 Select File > Page Setup. The Page Setup window displays. 2 Specify margins. 3 Show or hide title and grid lines as necessary. 4 Specify the sequence of pages to print with priority of row or column. 5 Specify the print type of the center of page, horizontal or vertical Special module monitoring 1 Click Monitor > Special Module Monitoring. The Special Module List window displays. It displays the list of special module currently installed on the PLC system. 2 Select a module on the list and click Monitor. The Special Module Monitoring window displays. The field descriptions for Special Module Monitoring window are as follows: Field Label FLAG Monitor (applicable only to HS counter module) Parameter Setting Screen Start Monitoring Test Description Flag monitoring function is used to run instructions for HS counter module. The user can check the instruction and enter signal status along with HS counter monitoring/test window as well as Flag monitoring window displays at the same time. Parameter setting window is divided into parameter changing area (setting value) and confirming area (current value), the changed parameter is successfully transferred to the module during monitoring. Click Start Monitoring to start monitoring. Click Stop Monitoring to stop monitoring. After changing the parameter in Monitoring/Test window, click Test Start to begin testing the operation of applicable special module, which directly transfers the R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 317 January 2011 Honeywell

318 12. Monitoring Trend monitoring parameter information to the module so to display its result on the monitoring window for the user to confirm. Contact Point Input Signal Status Screen Instruction Screen The user can confirm HS counter status of input contact point signal (ON/OFF) through the Flag monitoring window. The user can initiate the instruction for HS counter operation and additional functions at the Flag monitoring window. If the instruction is correctly run, the status of the applicable instruction displays as ON/OFF. 3 Through the Monitoring/Test window, the user can directly change the parameter value saved in the special module while checking the test operation and its status of the applicable module. ATTENTION Select the HS counter module on the special module window to write HS counter Flag monitoring and instruction functions Trend monitoring Trend monitoring is used to read the data periodically from the PLC connected to display in a graphical format. The trend monitoring window is composed of bit graph and trend graph. In the bit graph, bit address s On/Off status displays in stair-shaped graph. In trend graph, the variation trend of the data displays with the address value converted from word to data format specified. Configuring trend monitoring To configure trend monitoring, 1 Click Monitoring>Trend Monitoring. Select Graph > Trend Settings. The Trend Setup window displays. 318 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

319 12. Monitoring Trend monitoring 2 The field descriptions for Trend Setup window are as follows: Field Label Frequency Address Setting OK Cancel Description Used to specify the cycle to read data from PLC. The shorter the cycle, the more correct the data is, which may have an influence on PLC scan and PC performance. Used to assign the address to monitor. The address displays in bit or in real as specified. Click to save the changes and to close the window. Click to closes the window. ATTENTION The maximum samples to display cannot be greater than the maximum sample to keep. The maximum time to display cannot be greater than the maximum time to keep. The relationship between the maximum samples to keep and the maximum sample to display is as shown in the following figure. In the following figure, graph is of the current graph area displayed on the screen, which can be scrolled horizontally as many as the maximum samples displayed. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 319 January 2011 Honeywell

320 12. Monitoring Trend monitoring The maximum samples to keep means the maximum number of samples available to save on the file. Start trend monitoring Perform the following steps to start trend monitoring. 1 Connect to the PLC. 2 Click Monitor > Trend Monitoring. 320 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

321 12. Monitoring Trend monitoring The Legend description are as follows: Legend A B C D E F Description Bit graph: displays the data of bit address. Bit graph index: displays the bit graph and graph colors. Bit graph current value: displays the current value of the bit address. Trend graph: displays the data of word address. Trend graph index: displays the word address and graph colors. Trend graph current value: displays the current value of word address. ATTENTION The data displayed in the trend monitor may be different with the actual data. In order to monitor accurate timing, use the data trace function. REFERENCE - INTERNAL For information on the data trace function, refer to Data traces. Setting bit address It is used to enter the bit address to monitor. Perform the following steps to set a bit address. 1 Click Monitoring>Trend Monitoring. 2 Select Graph > Trend Settings. 3 Select the bit graph tab on the Trend Setup window. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 321 January 2011 Honeywell

322 12. Monitoring Trend monitoring 4 Enter the address of bit type or double-click the variable column to select the declared address on the Variable/Comment window. ATTENTION A maximum of eight bit addresses can be registered. Setting trend graph It is used to set the trend address to monitor. Perform the following steps to set a trend address. 1 Click Monitoring>Trend Monitoring. 2 Select Graph > Trend Settings. 3 Select the trend graph tab on the Setting Monitoring window. 4 Enter the address of word type or double-click the variable column to select the declared address on the Variable/Comment window. 5 Click the type column to select the data type. ATTENTION A maximum of four trend addresses can be registered. Supported data types are as follows: Type Size Type Size BIT 1 bit REAL 4 bytes BYTE 1 byte LREAL 8 bytes WORD 2 bytes INT 2 bytes DWORD 4 bytes DINT 4 bytes LWORD 8 bytes LINT 8 bytes 322 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

323 12. Monitoring Trend monitoring Setting graph Perform the following steps to view or change graph settings. 1 Click Monitoring>Trend Monitoring. 2 Select Graph > Graph Settings. The Graph Setup window displays. The field descriptions for Graph Setup window are as follows: Show grid Field Label Show X-axis data X-axis data option Minimum value/maximum value Bit graph legend Trend graph legend Color OK Cancel Description Used to decide to show XY grid or not on the window. Used to decide to show X-axis data or not. Used to specify the display method of X-axis data. Used to set the maximum/minimum range of the graph. Used to specify the position of bit graph index. No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left Bottom, and Right Bottom are available for the Bit Index Position. Used to specify the position of trend graph index. No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left Bottom, and Right Bottom are available for the Trend Index Position. Used to specify address color of each graph. Click to save the changes and to close the window. Click to close the window. ATTENTION The maximum/minimum value is applied only to Y-axis of the trend graph, and not applied if View Current Y-axis is automatically adjusted. The minimum value input cannot be greater than the maximum value. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 323 January 2011 Honeywell

324 12. Monitoring Trend monitoring The actual data s maximum/minimum value range and specified graph s maximum/minimum value range are as shown below. Only the range in gray is displayed in the graph. If you do not select View in Setting Color, its applicable address does not display in the graph. Graph color settings Perform the following steps to change the color of a graph. 1 Select the address to change its graph color. 2 Click the color column to display the Color dialog box. On the dialog box, select a color and click OK. 324 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

325 12. Monitoring Trend monitoring View graph option settings Perform the following steps to view graph option settings. 1 Select the address to change its Graph Option. 2 Select or cancel the Check Box of View Column. Setting graph window It is used to decide to change View Graph Option and display the data value as necessary. Perform the following steps to view or change graph window settings: 1 Click Monitoring>Trend Monitoring. 2 Select Graph > Graph window Settings. The Graph Window Setup window displays. The field descriptions for Graph Window Setup window are as follows: Field Label View all View bit graph View graph value View trend graph value Description Displays all the bit and trend graphs. Displays only the bit graph. Displays only the bit graph value. Displays the trend graph value. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 325 January 2011 Honeywell

326 12. Monitoring Trend monitoring Graph function View cursor It is used to display the data value where the mouse is positioned on. Perform the following steps to view the data value the mouse is positioned on. 1 Select Graph > Show Cursor. 2 Click to select the graph. Whenever the mouse moves, the data value where the cursor is positioned displays. ATTENTION Show cursor function is only active in the state of Stop Monitoring/Pause Monitoring. Scroll synchronization It is used to synchronize the bit graph with the trend graph in time axis. It is useful in monitoring the bit graph and the trend graph data simultaneously. For scroll synchronization: Select Graph > Synchronize Scrolling. Move the horizontal scroll bar to scroll the bit graph and the trend graph at the same time based on the specified scroll synchronization. 326 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

327 12. Monitoring Trend monitoring Adjust X-axis magnification It is used to adjust X-axis magnification. To adjust X-axis magnification: Select Graph > Zoom In X axis, Zoom Out X axis, Reset X-axis. Based on the selected item, X-axis s time interval is increased, decreased or back to default value. Adjust Y-axis magnification It is used to adjust Y-axis magnification. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 327 January 2011 Honeywell

328 12. Monitoring Trend monitoring To adjust Y-axis magnification: Select Graph > Zoom In Y axis, Zoom Out Y axis, Reset Y axis. Based on the selected item, Y-axis s height is increased, decreased or back to default value. Adjust X-axis automatically It is used to adjust X-axis automatically. If the automatic adjustment is set, the horizontal scroll bar disappears and all the data can be seen at a glance. To adjust X-axis automatically: Select Graph > Auto-Fit X axis. Auto-fit Y-axis It is used to decide to adjust Y-axis automatically. The automatic adjustment of Y-axis is applicable only to the trend graph. To adjust Y-axis automatically: Select Graph > Auto-Fit Y-axis. ATTENTION If the function of Auto-fit Y-axis is not selected, the display is based on the maximum/minimum value specified in Graph Settings. 328 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

329 12. Monitoring Trend monitoring Save as bitmap It is used to save the graph currently displayed on the window as bit map. Perform the following steps to save the data as a bitmap. 1 Select Graph > Save Trend data as Bitmap. 2 Input a file name to save as and then click OK. Save as text It is used to save the graph data as a text file. Samples as many as the maximum samples specified in setting the maximum graph saved. Perform the following steps to save the data as a text. 1 Select Graph > Save Trend data as Text. 2 Input a file name to save as and then click OK. ATTENTION The string file is saved in CSV format of Excel. Copy to clipboard It is used to copy the graph currently displayed on the window onto the window clipboard. Perform the following steps to copy the graph to clipboard. Select Graph > Copy to Clipboard. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 329 January 2011 Honeywell

330 12. Monitoring Data traces 12.8 Data traces Trace Data is used to specify the trace condition and address to trace in the PLC to collect the data complying with the specified condition from PLC. In the SoftMaster, applicable data read from the PLC displays as a graph. While being similar to the trend monitoring, it can collect more correct data as read from PLC. Trace Data operates as follows. s Details Ready Confirm the connection with PLC and the Run status of PLC. Trace Setting Decide to allow trace or not and specify trigger condition, sample properties, and trace address. For more information, refer to Trace setting. Writing to PLC Write trace setting items on PLC. For more information, refer to Write trace setting. Trace starts Read Data Start trace with specified trigger conditions automatically or with manual trace selected. For details on trigger setting, refer to Trace setting. For details on manual trace, refer to Write trace setting. Read trace data from PLC. For more details, see section on Read Trace in Write trace setting. Creating a graph For more details, refer to Trace setting. 330 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

331 12. Monitoring Data traces Perform the following steps to view data trace. 1 Click Monitor > Data Traces. The Data Traces window displays. 2 The field descriptions for Data Traces window are as follows: Field Label Description a. Menu Displays the data trace menu. b. Tool Box Displays the tool box of the data trace. c. Bit graph Index Displays the bit address and graph color. d. Bit graph Displays the data of bit address. e. Word graph Index Displays the word address and graph color. f. Word graph Displays the data of word address. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 331 January 2011 Honeywell

332 12. Monitoring Data traces g. Status bar Displays the status of data trace. h. Progress bar Displays the progress status if data is read from PLC. PLC status Displays off-line status and the operation status of PLC. j. Trace status Displays the trace status of PLC. Connecting to PLC To connect to the PLC: Click Online > Connect. ATTENTION For more information, refer to Connection options for the PLC. Trace setting It is used to specify trace conditions and trace address. Perform the following steps to view or change data trace settings. 1 Click Monitor> Data Traces. The Data Traces window displays. 2 On the Data Traces window, select Trace > Trace Settings from the menu. The Data trace setting window displays. The field descriptions for Data trace setting > Trend Setup window are as follows: Field Label Trace Trigger settings Bit condition Description Decides to allow the trace. You can enable or disable trace. Specifies the condition for trace start. You can select a bit trigger condition or word condition. Decides to use bit trigger condition. You can enable/disable bit trigger condition. For bit trigger setting, refer to 3: Setting Bit 332 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

333 12. Monitoring Data traces Trigger. Address Word condition Address Sampling frequency Total sample Samples after trigger OK Cancel Specifies the address to monitor the bit trigger condition. Decides to use word trigger condition. You can enable/disable word condition. As for word trigger setting, refer to 6: Setting Word Trigger. Specifies the address to monitor the word trigger condition. Specifies the cycle to collect data. Specifies the number of samples in total to collect. The number of samples in total is decided based on the input sample address. Specifies the number of samples to collect after triggered. Click to save the changes and to close the window. Click to close the window. Setting bit trigger 3 To set the bit trigger, select the bit condition check box. 4 Enter the address to use as a bit condition. Bit address format is only available. 5 Specify trigger condition, where rising or falling is available. Rising means that the address value changes from 0 to 1, and falling means that the address value changes from 1 to 0. Setting Word trigger 6 To set the Word Trigger, select the word condition check box. It uses the variation of the word address value as a trigger condition. 7 Enter the address to use as a word condition. Word address format is only available. 8 Enter the constant value to compare with word address value. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 333 January 2011 Honeywell

334 12. Monitoring Data traces 9 Select a condition to use to compare with the constant value input. Available conditions are as follows: < (less than), <= (less than or equal to), == (equal to), >= (greater than or equal to), > (greater than), Bit address settings 10 Select the Bit address settings tab on the Data Trace Settings window. It is used to select the bit address to collect data. The selected address displays in a bit graph. The field descriptions for Data trace setting > Bit address settings window are as follows: Field Label Number of addresses Size of data Address list Description Displays the number of bit addresses specified. Displays the size of the data specified. More than 1 bit address displays in 2 bytes. Displays the list of the bit addresses specified. Enter the address of bit type. Right-click and select Add Line to add a line. Right-click and select Delete Line to delete the address. ATTENTION A maximum of 16 bit type addresses can be entered. Word address settings 11 Select the word address setting tab on the Data Trace Settings window. It is used to select the word address to collect data. The selected address displays in a word graph. The field descriptions for Data trace setting > Word address settings window are as follows: Field Label Number of Address Size of data Description Displays the number of word address specified. Displays the size of the data specified. The size is 334 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

335 12. Monitoring Data traces decided based on the specified data type. Address list Address Data type Displays the list of the word addresses specified. Enter the address of word type. Select the data type of address. ATTENTION A maximum of eight addresses of word type can be entered. Supported data types are as follows: Type Size Type Size SINT 1 byte REAL 4 bytes INT 2 bytes LREAL 8 bytes DINT 4 bytes INT 2 bytes LINT 8 bytes DINT 4 bytes USINT 1 byte LINT 8 bytes ATTENTION Use the number of samples in total and the number of samples after trigger to apply various collection methods. Number of samples in total = number of samples after trigger: a method to collect data after trigger, which is used when the data before trigger is not necessary. Number of samples in total > number of samples after triggered ( 0): a method to collect data even before trigger, which is used when the data before and after trigger is necessary. Number of samples after triggered = 0: a method not to collect data after trigger, which is used when the data after trigger is not necessary. Graph settings To view or change graph address settings: Select Graph > Graph Settings. The Graph Setting window displays. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 335 January 2011 Honeywell

336 12. Monitoring Data traces a) Show grid: used to decide whether to show XY grid or not on the window. b) Show trigger: used to decide whether to display the trigger position on the graph, and to specify the color. c) Bit graph legend: used to specify the position of bit graph index. The options are displayed as: No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left Bottom, and Right Bottom for the Bit Index Position. d) Word graph legend: used to specify the position of word graph index. The options are displayed as: No Index, Left Upper, Right Upper, Left Bottom, and Right Bottom for the Word Index Position. e) Color setup: used to specify address color of each graph. f) OK: saves the changes and closes the window. g) Cancel: closes the window. 336 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

337 12. Monitoring Data traces Graph color setting Perform the following steps to change the color of a graph: 1 Select the address to change its graph color. 2 Click the color column to display color dialog box. On the dialog box, select a color and click OK. Trace It is used to read the data traced from the PLC or the data specified. Write trace setting It applies the trace setting to the PLC. To view write trace settings: Click Trace > Write Trace Settings. Read trace settings It is used to read trace settings from the PLC. To view read trace settings: Click Trace > Read Trace Settings. Read data traces It reads trace data from PLC. To read data traces: Click Trace > Read Trace. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 337 January 2011 Honeywell

338 12. Monitoring Data traces Start manual trace Animation It is used to start to trace data under the trace condition currently specified. To start tracing the data manually: Click Trace > Start Manual Trace. If data is currently traced, the applicable menu is inactive. Using the trace data read from the PLC, it displays the data chronological sequence. Animation settings To view animation settings: 1 On the Data Traces window menu, select Animation > Animation Setting. The Animation window displays. The field descriptions for Animation window are as follows: Field Label Frequency OK Cancel Description Used to specify the cycle to update the data sample on the window. Available data update cycles are 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000, and 2000ms value. Click to save the changes and to close the window. Click to close the window. Start It is used to start Animation. Animation is active only with trace data is available. Click Animation > Start Animation. Pause It is used to stop Animation in progress momentarily. Click Animation > Animation Pause/Resume. 338 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

339 12. Monitoring Data traces Resume It is used to continue Animation which was momentarily stopped. Click Animation > Animation Pause/Resume. Stop It is used to stop Animation. Graph function Click Animation > Stop Animation. REFERENCE - INTERNAL For additional information on the basic graph functions, refer to Graph function. Move trigger It moves the trigger to its generated point of time. To move the trigger: Click Graph > Go to Trigger Position. File function It is used to save or read trace setting from the file. Open Perform the following steps to open a file. 1 Click File > Open. The File dialog box displays. 2 Select a file name to open and click OK. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 339 January 2011 Honeywell

340 12. Monitoring Data traces Save Perform the following steps to save a file. 1 Click File > Save. The File Save dialog box displays. 2 Enter the file name to save with and click OK. Save as Perform the following steps to save a file with a specific file name. 1 Click File > Save As. The File Save dialog box displays. 2 Enter a different file name to save and click OK. Save as bit map It is used to save the graph currently displayed on the window as a bit map. Perform the following steps to save the data as a bit map. 1 Click File > Send > Save as Bitmap. 2 Enter the name of a file to save and click OK. Save text It is used to save the graph data on the file in text. Samples as many as the maximum samples specified in setting as maximum graph are saved. Perform the following steps to save trace data as text. 1 Click File > Send > Save Trace data as Text. 2 Enter a file name to save and click OK. 340 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

341 12. Monitoring Data traces Copy clipboard View function View tool bar It is used to copy the graph currently displayed on the window clipboard. To copy the data onto the windows clipboard: Click File > Send > Copy to Clipboard. This function is used to display or hide the tool bar and the status display line on the window. To view toolbar: Click View > Tool Name. View status display line To view status display line: Click View > Status Bar. Data It displays the trace data value. View Data is active only with trace data available. To view Trace Data: Click View > Trace Data. The Trace Data window displays. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 341 January 2011 Honeywell

342 12. Monitoring Custom events a) Trace info: displays the trace sampling cycle. b) View Settings: displays the trace details. c) Data Grid: displays the current value specified in the sequence of the samples. The sample data displays in negative before trigger, and in positive after trigger. d) Minimum, Maximum, Average: displays the Minimum, Maximum, and Average value per address. e) Close: closes the window. 342 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

343 12. Monitoring Custom events 12.9 Custom events Overview of custom events The custom events refer to a series of events whose conditions are the addresses specified by the user. User-defined events are registered in the PLC, which monitors the registered events and records the event history if generated. The event history can be used to operate and debug the system. Perform the following steps to set custom events. 1 Create a program as follows: 2 Write the program to the PLC and click Monitor > Custom Event. The Custom Event window displays. 3 Click Menu>Add event. The Event Setting window displays and setup basic setting in the window. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 343 January 2011 Honeywell

344 12. Monitoring Custom events 4 Click Associated Address Setup tab and setup the bit address %MX100 and word address %MW0 to store the data when the event is met. 5 Click OK to close the window. Select Enable for Custom Event Capture and click OK. A message displays since the event setup has been changed. Click Yes. 6 Change the PLC mode to RUN. 7 Click Online > Monitor > Custom Event to check event history. The Custom Event window displays and select Event History tab. 8 In the Event History tab, an Event History window displays when you select an event item, click Properties to view the list of associated address and the details of event. Event setting Example An event is defined as the data of %MW0 whose data increase by 1 if every scan is greater than 100 and less than 110, and if the event is met, PLC stores the data of %MW0. Perform the following steps for event setting. 1 Click Monitor > Custom Events. The Custom Events window displays. 2 Click Event settings tab. The field descriptions for Custom Events window are as follows: Field Label Custom Event capture Description Used to determine whether to allow the user event or not. If the event is disabled, PLC does not collect the Custom Events. 344 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

345 12. Monitoring Custom events Events History Menu Apply PLC OK Cancel Displays the list of the Custom Events currently specified. Displays the event setting menu. Applies the changes to CPU without closing the window. Click to save the changes and to close the window. Click to close the window. ATTENTION For additional information on each item of the events list, refer to Adding custom event item. Adding custom event item Perform the following steps to add a custom event item: 1 On the Custom Event window, select Add Event from Menu. The Event Setting window displays. 2 Select the Basic setting tab. The field descriptions for Event Setting > Basic Setting window are as follows: Field Label Address Variable Names Event condition Description Used to enter the address to monitor the events. The event address is of the value 0 or 1 in bit format only. Displays Variable/Comment dialog box. The address can be selected from Variable/Comment declared in the Variable/Comment dialog box. Used to specify the condition to make the user event occur. If you select rising condition, the user event occurs when the event address value changes from 0 to 1. And if you select falling condition, the user event occurs when the event address value changes from 1 to 0. If you select transition condition, the user R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 345 January 2011 Honeywell

346 12. Monitoring Custom events event occurs whenever the event address value changes. Type Message OK Cancel Used to specify the user event type. You can select an applicable type among Information, Alarm, and Warning. Used to enter an event message. The maximum length of the message is 80 characters in English. The event message input is displays with Event History menu. Click to save the changes and to closes the window. Click to close the window. 3 Enter event address information, event conditions, event type, and event message or click Variable/Comment to select the address from the declared Variable/Comment. 4 Select the Associated address s setting tab to specify the Associated address. Associated address is used to capture the values of related address including any values. The field descriptions for Event Setting > Associated address s setting window are as follows: Field Label Description Available Associated addresses Setup Displays the sum of the size of the each associated address type input, which is available up to 16 bytes. Used to enter the associated addresses. You can enter up to eight associated addresses. 5 Click OK to save the entered items, or click Cancel to cancel it. ATTENTION Event type is specified by user based on the importance of the event and is used as a classifying method of events for Event View. 346 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

347 12. Monitoring Custom events REFERENCE - INTERNAL For additional information on address type and display format, refer to Registering variable/comment. Also refer to Event history. ATTENTION If associated addresses are specified, the value of the associated addresses is also recorded when applicable events happen. Up to eight associated addresses can be specified in up to 16 bytes based on the data type of the address input. Supported data type and its respective byte size are as follows: Type Size Type Size BIT 1 Byte REAL 4 Bytes USINT 1 Byte LREAL 8 Bytes UINT 2 Bytes INT 2 Bytes UDINT 4 Bytes DINT 4 Bytes ULINT 8 Bytes LINT 8 Bytes Up to 10 custom events are available for registration. Editing events It is used to edit the user event items. Perform the following steps to edit a user event. 1 Select the event to edit. 2 Right-click and select Edit Event from the context menu. The Event Setting window displays. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 347 January 2011 Honeywell

348 12. Monitoring Custom events 3 Update the changes and click OK to save the changes, or click Cancel to cancel it. Deleting event It deletes the user event input. Perform the following steps to delete an event. 1 Select the event to delete. 2 Right-click and select delete from the context menu. 3 Select Delete All from the context menu to delete all events. Custom event capture It is used to Enable or Disable event capture. Corresponding to Custom Event Capture, click Enable to capture the event, or click Disable to disable the event capture. Event capture setting You can enable/disable each event from being displayed. Perform the following steps to enable/display an event. 1 Select the event to be enabled. 2 Select the checkbox corresponding to the event in the Enable column to enable it. Clear the checkbox to disable it. 348 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

349 12. Monitoring Custom events Custom event copy/paste Perform the following steps to copy/paste custom events. 1 Select the event to copy. Right-click and select Copy from the context menu. 2 Move to the position to paste and right-click and select Paste from the context menu. 3 The Event is pasted in the selected row. Custom event cut/paste Perform the following steps to cut/paste custom events. 1 Select the event to cut. 2 Right-click and select Cut from the context menu. 3 Move to the position to paste. 4 Right-click and select Paste from the context menu. Save event Since the user-defined event is saved in PLC, it is additionally saved to manage as files. Perform the following steps to save all the events. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 349 January 2011 Honeywell

350 12. Monitoring Custom events 1 Select the event. 2 Right-click and Save Event from the context menu. 3 Enter a file name to save on the File Save dialog box and click OK. Open event It read user-defined event setting from the file. Perform the following steps to open an event. 1 On the Custom Event window, right-click and select Open Event from the context menu. 2 Select a file to read and then click OK. ATTENTION The event if opened is added to the list of current events. A maximum of 10 custom events are added to the list. Event history Read the user event history saved in the PLC to display the details. Perform the following steps to view event history. 1 Click Monitor>Custom Event. The Custom Event window displays. 2 Select the Event History tab. The field descriptions for Custom Event > Event History window are as follows: Field Label Event History List Description Displays the event history available on the PLC. 350 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

351 12. Monitoring Custom events Menu Apply PLC OK Cancel Displays the event history related menu. Inactive on the event history page. Click to save the changes and to close the window. Click to close the window. ATTENTION For additional information on event history item, refer to Detailed event history view. Detailed event history view REFERENCE - INTERNAL For additional information on an event history item, refer to Detailed event history view. It displays the details of the event. Perform the following steps to view the details of an event. 1 On the Custom Event window, select the item to display its Event History. 2 Select Information. The Event History window displays. The field descriptions for Event History window are as follows: Date Field Label Description Displays the date when an event occurs in Year- Month-Date format. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 351 January 2011 Honeywell

352 12. Monitoring Custom events Time Condition Related address list Back Next Copy Close Displays the time when an event occurs in Hour: Minute: Second: MS. Displays event details specified in event setting items. Displays the associated address list and the value when the event occurred. Right-click on View in hexadecimal or View as specified to change the display format of the address value. Displays the previous event history. Displays the next event history. Copies the current event history. Closes the window. REFERENCE - INTERNAL For additional information on an event history item, refer to Detailed event history view. Refresh It updates the event history with recent details in PLC. To refresh the event history, on the Custom Event window, click Menu>Refresh. Event filtering The history displays based on the event type selected. Select View All. 352 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

353 12. Monitoring Custom events Select View Information. Select View Warning Select View Alarm R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 353 January 2011 Honeywell

354 12. Monitoring Custom events 354 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

355 13.1 Start/stop debugging 13. Debugging Start debugging Perform the following steps to start debugging. 1 Click Online > Connect to connect to the PLC, 2 Click Online > Write to download the program to the PLC. 3 Click Online > Change Mode > Debug or Debug > Start/Stop Debugging. ATTENTION Debug is unavailable if PLC operation is in Run mode. This function is available only with PLC in online mode. Debug function is available only when the SoftMaster program and PLC program are identical. If they are not identical, download the applicable program. Monitoring function is also available in Debug mode. If an error occurs on the PLC, Debug instruction does not work normally. Clear the error to run the Debug instruction. Stop debugging Perform the following steps to stop debugging. 1 Click Online > Change Mode > Stop or Debug > Start/Stop Debugging. 2 PLC ends Debug and changes to the STOP mode. ATTENTION Even if Debug stops, Monitoring continues. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 355 January 2011 Honeywell

356 13. Debugging LD program debugging 13.2 LD program debugging It is used to specify functions to debug the prepared LD program. Set remove breakpoints It is used to set or remove the Breakpoint per step. Set breakpoint Perform the following steps to set Breakpoints. 1 Move the mouse cursor to the step to specify. 2 Click Debug > Set/Remove Breakpoints. ATTENTION The break cannot be set on the area specified by a Block Mask instruction. Application instruction sets the breakpoint on the instruction string area. 356 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

357 13. Debugging LD program debugging Remove breakpoint Perform eth following steps to remove Breakpoints. 1 Move the Breakpoint to the step to remove. 2 Click Debug > Set/Remove Breakpoints. Go It starts program debugging using the specified Breakpoint. With the Go function, the program can be run up to the Breakpoint specified. Perform the following steps to run the program up to the specified Breakpoint. 1 Click Debug > Go. The program runs until the breakpoint condition is reached. 2 To go to the next Breakpoint, click Debug > Go. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 357 January 2011 Honeywell

358 13. Debugging LD program debugging Go to cursor It is used to make the program run up to the cursor position. Perform the following steps to run the program until the cursor position. 1 Move the cursor to the position to run. 2 Click Debug > Go to the Cursor. 358 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

359 13. Debugging LD program debugging into, step out and step over functions into If the Breakpoint is engaged during debugging, its progress is made step by step. When debugging a program, Into, Out functions are provided. It runs the program to the next step. If the current step is an application instruction CALL with the running condition satisfied, it enters the subroutine block. On the menu, click Debug > Into. ATTENTION If not with CALL instruction or if the CALL running condition is not satisfied, the program runs to the next step. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 359 January 2011 Honeywell

360 13. Debugging LD program debugging out It is used to step out of the subroutine block once entered with into function executed. On the menu, click Debug > Out. 360 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

361 13. Debugging LD program debugging ATTENTION If the currently debugged step is not inside the subroutine block, the program is run to the next step. over It is used to run the program to the next step. Unlike Into, even if the current step is an application instruction CALL, it does not enter the subroutine block but run the program to the next step. On the menu, click Debug > Over. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 361 January 2011 Honeywell

362 13. Debugging List of break points 13.3 List of break points The list shows all the Break Points being used in the program, where the user can decide to use or delete the Break Point. On the menu, click Debug > Breakpoints List. Use: If the breakpoint is deselected, it is not deleted from the list. Program: Displays the name of the program where the breakpoint is used. : Displays the step number where the breakpoint is caught. Count: The number of time run, as the specified steps where the breakpoint is caught, PLC is braked. (Example: if the breakpoint is set inside, FOR 20 ~ NEXT with the number of times 10, FOR 20 ~NEXT is run 10 times and then is braked.) OK: Saves the changes and closes the window. Cancel: Closes the window without saving the changes. Select All: Checks all the listed items to allow. Reset: Cancels all the checked items previously allowed. Go to: Used to move to the position where the selected breakpoint is used. Remove: Deletes the selected breakpoints from the list. Remove All: Deletes all the breakpoints from the list. 362 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

363 13. Debugging Variable break ATTENTION A maximum of 62 Breakpoints can be registered in the PLC Variable break Applicable debugging is available based on the data value and the application of the variable. Setting variable break On the menu, click Debug > Breakpoint Conditions. The Break Condition window displays. Select Variable Break point tab. a) Use the address as a variable break point: If you do not select the check box, the variable break even if saved, is not be used. b) Variable: Shows the variable name used for variable break. c) Program: Shows the program name of the variable used for variable break. d) Address: Displays the address name if the variable s memory is allocated in the local variable. e) Comment: Displays the comment if the variable s comment is declared in the local variable. f) Value Condition: If you do not select the check box, the value even if saved, does not make the value break engaged. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 363 January 2011 Honeywell

364 13. Debugging Scan break Variable break run g) Value: If the specified address value is reached, the break is engaged. The maximum/minimum value is based on the variable type. h) OK: Saves the changes and closes the window. i) Cancel: Closes the window without saving the changes. j) Select Variable: Finds a specific variable on the variable list. k) Condition: Makes the break engaged when writing the value or reading the value from address. Perform the following steps to set variable break run. 1 Specify the variable break. 2 On the menu, click Debug > Go. PLC runs debugging. 3 If specified variable break conditions are met, a message displays to inform that the variable break is engaged, when PLC stops running. 364 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

365 13. Debugging Scan break ATTENTION Among variable types, BYTE, NIBBLE, and STRING do not support the variable break instruction. When the PLC is in debug mode, the meeting of any one condition (breakpoint, variable break, scan break, and so on), applies the break. Click the program name to move to the program position where the variable break is applied. If the value is changed in other application programs (such as address monitor) other than the specified program, movement to the program position where the variable break is applied may not be possible Scan break This function is used to run PLC as many times as the scan times specified, and apply the break. Perform the following steps to use the Scan Break function. 1 On the menu, click Debug > Breakpoint Conditions. The Break Condition window displays. 2 Select Scan Break point tab. a) Use Scan Break point: If you do not select this check box, the specified scan break times even if saved, is not run while PLC runs debugging. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 365 January 2011 Honeywell

366 13. Debugging Scan break b) Scan Count: Used to enter scan times to apply the break. 1 ~ is available for the setting value. Scan break run Perform the following steps to apply scan break. 1 Select Use Scan Break and specify the scan times to apply the break. 2 If you select Debug > Go, PLC runs debugging. 3 PLC informs that the scan break is engaged after executing as many as specified scan times. 366 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

367 14. Online Editing 14.1 Online editing sequence This Online Editing function is used to edit the PLC program with PLC operation status in RUN mode. Open Project Connect Start Monitoring Start * 프로그램 Online Editing 창이 * Start Online Editing starts after active. Edit * Start Online Editing and Write Modified Program can be repeated. Write Modified Program End Online Editing R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 367 January 2011 Honeywell

368 14. Online Editing Online editing sequence Open project Click Project > Open Project. Opens the project identical to the PLC project to perform Online Editing. or Connect Click Project > Open from PLC. Click Online > Connect to connect to the PLC. Start monitoring Click Monitor > Start Monitoring. Online Editing is available while monitoring. Start/Stop Monitoring is available during Online Editing. Start online editing Click Online > Start Online Editing. Online editing is available after its program window is active and the program is selected. After Program or Variable is edited during Run, the program window changes to edit mode during Run. 368 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

369 14. Online Editing Online editing sequence Edit If Online Editing starts, the background color of the program can be changed through its applicable option. Online Editing is the same as specified in the off-line Edit. In case of the LD, the edited rung is indicated with ( * ). Write modified program Click Online > Write Modified Program. The applicable program only is transferred to PLC. In case of the LD, the edited rung is indicated with ( * ). End online editing Click Online > End Online Editing. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 369 January 2011 Honeywell

370 14. Online Editing Online editing sequence ATTENTION Project cannot be closed during Online Edit. One or more programs can be modified during Run. While editing during Run, the monitoring value is not correct. For the items to edit during Run, refer to the followings: (Edit item means add, delete, and change are available) Item Description Edit Item Description Edit Project properties Add X User-defined Add Delete X function/function Delete X block Change X Change X Add X LD Edit Program Delete X IL Edit X Change SFC Edit X Add Add X Global variable Delete X SFC action (LD) Delete X Change X Change Local variable Add Add X Delete SFC Transition (LD) Delete X Change Change Add Parameter change Edit X User-defined type Delete X Local variable retain setting Edit Change X Global variable retain setting Edit X 370 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

371 15. Printing 15.1 Print project Printing a project This instruction is used to print the contents of a project sequentially. It is also used to select items to be printed, specify necessary setting options for printing per item, and execute Preview and Print instruction. To print the contents of a project: Click Project > Print Project. The Print Project window displays. a) Project Level Diagram: Displays tree structure of the item printable in the Project. Detailed setting functions are available in the tree structure of the Level Diagram. Print and Previous View functions are available for the selected item. b) Print: Prints the selected item in the Project Level Diagram. c) Save Selection Item: Saves the selected item in the Project Level Diagram. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 371 January 2011 Honeywell

372 15. Printing Print project d) Details: Used to specify details of the selected item in the Project Level Diagram. e) Preview: Used to view the selected item before print in the Project Level Diagram. f) Settings: Sets the general print options such as Printer Setting, Print Page Setting, Margin Setting, and so on. ATTENTION Details button in the Project Level Tree is enabled only if you select the Cover, Program, I/O parameter. Refer to each print option for setting each item in detail (Program Print Setting Program Print). Address and Memory Reference used in the Project Level Diagram are identical to those on the window displayed when View > Used Address and View > Cross Reference are executed on the menu. Print setting It is used to specify paper to print on and the printer. Click Settings>Page Setup on the Print Project window or right-click on the Print Project window and select Page Setup from the context menu.. a) Details: Refer to Print Setting for each item. b) Page Setup: Used to specify the page setup of the paper to print on. c) Header/Footer: Used to enter string displayed on the Header and Footer. Page setup It is used to specify margins of paper to print. Perform the following steps to specify the Page setup: 372 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

373 15. Printing Print project 1 Click Printer Settings on the Print window. 2 Select Page Setup from the context menu. The Page Setup window displays. a) Shows how the page layout will look. b) Size: Used to select paper to print on. c) Orientation: Used to select a printing direction. d) Back to Default: Details of Margins, Header and Footer are changed back to default, sets the basic value specified when the program is installed. e) Margin Setting: Specifies margins of paper printed. f) Printer: Used to change the setting options of the printer. ATTENTION Ensure that print contents do not overwrite with header or footer when printed, with respect to margins. If there are no contents in header/footer, the header/footer is not R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 373 January 2011 Honeywell

374 15. Printing Print project Header/footer setting printed. It is used to specify the content of Header/Footer. a) Content Setting: used to enter the content in the left/center/right of the Header/Footer. b) Insert Field: used to insert the field into the position of the cursor currently placed on the Edit Box (left, center, right) SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

375 15. Printing Print project ATTENTION If the content of the header/footer is long, the header/footer in the left, center or right may be printed as overwritten with each other. The user can specify the content of the header/footer using Input and Field at the same time. Example: If the content of The date today is &d is input on the header/footer The date today is is printed. Field Content Date: &d yyyy-mm-dd Time: &t hh:mm:ss Project name: &p PLC name: &c PLC type: &T Page number/total Page number: &n Page number/total Page number of the selected items. Page number/item page number: &N Page number/item page number of one item. Program name: &P displays only in program print mode. File Name: &f file name of the current project. Path and file name: &F file name displayed with its directory route. Project comment: &C Project comment is printed if any. If the comment is too long may not be correctly printed. Cover setup It is used to specify the print cover. Perform the following steps to specify the print cover. 1 Select Cover in the Project Level Diagram on the Print Project window. 2 Right-click Cover and select Details or click or press Enter key. The Cover Setup window displays. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 375 January 2011 Honeywell

376 15. Printing Print project The field descriptions for Cover Setup window are as follows: Field Label Cover Paper Margin Display Edit Box Edit Font Add Description Default is A4 vertical. Printed differently based on the paper setup. If the Edit Box exceeds the paper, the exceeded area is not printed. Displays the specified margins with a dotted line. Displays the content printed on the cover, where the content, font, and position can be changed. Used to edit the content of the currently selected Edit Box. Double-click the Edit Box or press Enter key when the Edit Box is selected to edit. If the field is inserted, Edit is also available. Changes font of the currently selected Edit Box. Adds a new Edit Box to the print cover. 376 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

377 15. Printing Print project Delete OK Cancel Deletes the currently selected Edit Box. Click to save the changes and to close the window. Click to close the window. Add content Perform the following steps to add content. 1 On the Cover Setup window, right-click and select Add from context menu. 2 Move the mouse on the Cover setup page. The mouse cursor changes. 3 Click on Cover setup page to view an Edit dialog box. Edit the required text. 4 Press ESC to change the mouse cursor to the arrow shape again. ATTENTION Edit Box can be aligned in the page. It is available through the menu, right-click and select the alignment from the context menu. Edit Box > Center: aligns the selected Edit Box to the center of page. String > left Align: aligns the content of the selected Edit Box to the left of the page. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 377 January 2011 Honeywell

378 15. Printing LD program print The edge of the Edit Box is not printed. Edit Box can be moved by Drag and Drop instruction of the mouse or with the arrow keys. Undo and Redo are not available. If string including field is previously viewed, the field is displayed as analyzed. If edited, the field is displayed back LD program print It is used to print the selected LD program. Print setting Perform the following steps to configure the print setting. 1 Select the program item to print. 2 Click Project > Print. The Print Setup window displays. The field descriptions for Print Setup window are as follows: 378 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

379 15. Printing LD program print Field Label Select Program View Options Contact Print Range Print in Color Print Grid Print Output Comment Print OK Cancel Print Setting Page Setting Description Selects a program to print. In LD program, you cannot select IL program print. Used to specify View Options for printing. Refer to Viewing program options for each View Option. Used to specify the number of contacts in a line. The number of contact is fixed to the number currently displayed, if printing is executed in the LD program. Used to specify print range. Used to decide whether print is in color or not. If you select the check box, the print is in color, and if you do not select, it is in black-and-white. Used to decide whether to apply Grid Print or not. Used to print output comment. Starts to print with the currently specified options applied. Click to save the currently specified options and to close the window. Click to close the window. Used to specify the printer setup options. Used to invoke Page Setup window. The size of paper and space of print page can be setup in the Page Setup window. ATTENTION When printing the project, click Details after selecting the program name to set print setup. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 379 January 2011 Honeywell

380 15. Printing LD program print Print preview It is used to see the preview of the specified print job. Click Project > Preview. 380 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

381 16.1 Overview 16. User Function/Function Block You can personally create and use a function/function block, which is not provided by SoftMaster. The User Function/Function Block can be created as follows: R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 381 January 2011 Honeywell

382 16. User Function/Function Block Create user function/function block 16.2 Create user function/function block Perform the following steps to create a user function/function block. 1 Click Project > Add Item >-Function. or Click Project > Add Item > Function Block. The User Function/Function Block window displays. The field descriptions for User Function/Function Block window are as follows: Field Label Program Name Language Use EN/ENO Return Data Type Program description OK Cancel Description Used for entering a User Function/Function Block. When the user-defined function/function is registered, the input name is registered. Used for selecting a programming language for the User Function/Function Block. A user-defined function is created only by the LD language while a user-defined function block can be created by the LD, SFC, or ST language. Used for selecting whether to use or not use EN/ENO, which is used under the operation condition of function/function block. If you do not select EN/ENO, you should declare BOOL type variable in the first input and first output parameters of the function/function block. Designates the type of the results after a userdefined function is executed. It is activated only when a user-defined function is created. Used for entering the comment for a User Function/Function Block. Unnecessarily do not enter comment. Click to save the changes and to close the window. Click to cancel the changes and to close the window. 382 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

383 16. User Function/Function Block Create user function/function block I/O variable ATTENTION If you click OK, a new item with the name entered in the item of User Function/Function Block creates Create user function/function block I/O variable Perform the following steps to create a user function/function block I/O variable. 1 Double-click a local variable among the items created with the name of User Function/Function Block, the following local variable window displays. a) VAR_RETURN: A type of variable representing the value of user-defined function. It is automatically created as a variable with the same name of the user-defined function with return type designated when creating a user-defined function. b) Function type: Used to automatically display input variable, I/O variable, function/function block type by output variable in the local variable window. The type is same as when using the User Function/Function Block in the scan program. 2 Add input variable, I/O variable, and output value in the local variable window. Depending on the added I/O variables, the function/function block type is automatically changed on the local variable window. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 383 January 2011 Honeywell

384 16. User Function/Function Block User function/function block programming ATTENTION Minimum input variable and output variable must be at least one. But, the maximum number is limited to User function/function block programming Perform the following steps to create a user function/function block programming. 1 Double-click a program among the items created with the newly created User Function/Function Block, a program window with the previously designated language appears. The following window shows the screen created when selecting the LD. 384 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

385 16. User Function/Function Block User function/function block programming 2 Create a program, based on the variable input in the local variable window. ATTENTION If local variable edit and program edit are completed, select function/function block toolbar instruction to check whether the edited User Function/Function Block is registered. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 385 January 2011 Honeywell

386 16. User Function/Function Block Working with user function/function block 16.5 Working with user function/function block Perform the following steps to use user function/function block. 1 Open the program to use a User Function/Function Block and move the cursor to the position to input. 2 Click Function/Function Block Toolbar. 3 Select a User Function/Function Block in the function/function block tool bar. The Function/Function Block window displays. 4 Enter the variable to be used in the input/output of function/function block. 386 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

387 17. SoftMaster Simulator 17.1 Overview of the SoftMaster simulator (SIM) Features of SoftMaster-SIM SoftMaster-SIM is a simulated PLC for MasterLogic PLC series. If using the SoftMaster- SIM, you can run your program without the PLC, or you can debug a PLC program by using input condition setting or module simulation function. SoftMaster-SIM supports the following function: Program simulation You can simulate the program written by LD/SFC/ST in the SoftMaster. It supports online editing by which you can edit during RUN mode and debugging function by which you can trace the program as step unit. PLC online function You can use program monitoring function and online diagnosis function such as system monitoring, address monitoring, trend monitoring, data trace, and custom events. Module simulation You can simulate the digital I/O module, A/D conversion module, D/A conversion module, counter, temperature control module, positioning module. By using simulation function, you can set the input value of each module. I/O input condition setting You can set address value by setting specific address value or channel value of the module as input condition. If you use I/O input condition setting, you need not write other program to test PLC program. System configuration for execution of SoftMaster-SIM The system configuration required by SoftMaster-SIM is higher than that of SoftMaster. Minimum specification: Pentium 3900MHz, RAM 256MB. Recommended specification: Pentium 4, 1.5GHz, RAM 512MB and more. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 387 January 2011 Honeywell

388 17. SoftMaster Simulator Overview of the SoftMaster simulator (SIM) ATTENTION In case of minimum specification, the fixed period scan may not operate properly because scan period may be longer than the fixed period and disconnection may occur. Despite using recommended specification, if system load is heavy, same phenomenon may occur. And regardless of system specification, according to user setting like system s SLEEP mode, disconnection can occur. When using fixed period, fixed period error/warning dialog box may not display. Starting SoftMaster-SIM Perform the following steps to start SoftMaster-SIM. 1 Start SoftMaster and write the program to execute through the SoftMaster- SIM. 2 On the SoftMaster menu, click Tools > Start Simulator. If SoftMaster-SIM is executed, the program is downloaded into SoftMaster-SIM automatically. If SoftMaster-SIM is executed, status becomes online, connection, stop. 3 Click Online > Change Mode > Run and execute the download program. When using SoftMaster-SIM, for online menu supported by SoftMaster, refer to the following table. 388 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

389 17. SoftMaster Simulator Overview of the SoftMaster simulator (SIM) Menu items support Menu items support Open from PLC Fault mask Ⅹ Change Mode (Run) Module changing wizard Ⅹ Change Mode (Stop) Start online editing Change Mode (Debug) Write modified program Disconnect Ⅹ End online editing Read Ⅹ Start/stop monitoring Write Pause Compare with PLC Ⅹ Resume Set Flash Memory (Set) Ⅹ Pausing conditions Set Flash Memory (Remove) Ⅹ Change current value Reset PLC Ⅹ System monitoring Clear PLC Address monitoring PLC Information (CPU) Special module monitoring PLC Information (Performance) PLC Information (Password) PLC Information (PLC RTC) Custom events Data traces Start/stop debugging PLC History (Error Log) Debug (Go) PLC History (Mode Log) PLC History (Shut down Log) Debug ( Over) Debug ( Into) R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 389 January 2011 Honeywell

390 17. SoftMaster Simulator Overview of the SoftMaster simulator (SIM) Menu items support Menu items support PLC History (System Log) Debug ( Out) PLC errors/warnings Debug (Go to Cursor) I/O Information Set/Remove Breakpoints Force I/O Breakpoints list Skip I/O Breakpoint conditions 390 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

391 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration 17.2 Program window configuration Configuring the program window The following figure displays the typical SoftMaster-SIM window. 1. Channel list Displays favorite channels according to module and channel. In case of module, displays only module set in I/O parameter. In module, B0 means base number and S00 means slot number. 2. I/O condition Displays single I/O condition and continuous I/O condition. Displays simulator s status: R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 391 January 2011 Honeywell

392 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Status Description Window Initial conditions Displays initial status. Connection by simulator is not available. Connection available It means connection is ready and turns on red LED. Single I/O condition execution Continuous I/O condition execution It means Single I/O condition is under execution. Under execution, green LED flickers. It means Continuous I/O is under execution. Under execution, yellow LED flicker. Channel list Module channel In tree view, double-click the channel you want to read. If you use specific channel as favorite channel, select favorite channel check box. 392 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

393 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Channel monitor Perform the following steps to monitor a channel. Start monitoring: 1 Click Tool > Start channel monitoring. To modify channel current value: 1 Select the channel you want to modify the current value. 2 In the selected channel, move to the current value column 3 Double-click or press Enter. The Channel Value Modification dialog box displays. Module Name: displays the module name. Channel Name: displays the channel name. Channel type: displays the data type of the selected channel. Bit value: in case of bit type, select off/on. Input Value: in case it is not bit type, input the value directly. In case the value is output value, you cannot change the current value of each channel. Stop channel monitoring: 1 Click Tool > Stop channel monitoring. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 393 January 2011 Honeywell

394 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration I/O condition I/O condition is used to write a specific value to specific address when specific condition is met by user input. For example, if address %IX0.0.0 becomes 1, set address %MX0~%MX100 as 1. The user should modify address value periodically by using the monitor current value of SoftMaster or write other PLC program to test PLC program. SoftMaster-SIM support reflects the data yielded to a module or entered from a module to a program. Condition expression Displays condition expression used in the single input condition and continuous condition. One condition expression consists of more than one condition by combination of conditions. Type Operator Priority Contents == 4 Equal!= 5 Not equal Comparison > 6 Greater than >= 7 Greater than or equal to <= 8 Less than or equal to < 9 Less than + 2 Add Numerical operation - 3 Subtract * 0 Multiply / 1 Division Bit operation & 12 Bit multiply 13 Bit sum ^ 14 Exclusive bit sum 394 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

395 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Type Operator Priority Contents Logical operation ETC. && 10 Logical multiply 11 Logical sum ( - ) - Comparison target is address or channel. For example, if you write address %MW0 is larger than 100 and %M10 is on as condition expression, the condition expression is as follows: (%MW0 > 100) && (%MX10 == TRUE) It supports five addresses such as %I, %Q, %M, %R, %W. Basic functions Single I/O condition and continuous I/O has the following interface. Adding I/O condition Perform the following steps to add an I/O condition. 1 Move the cursor to the position to add a new I/O condition. 2 Click Edit > Properties. 3 Edit I/O condition and click OK. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 395 January 2011 Honeywell

396 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Edit I/O condition Perform the following steps to edit an I/O condition. 1 Select an I/O condition to edit. 2 Click Edit > Properties. 3 Modify the items in the I/O condition dialog box and click OK. Cut/Paste I/O condition Perform the following steps to cut/paste an I/O condition. 1 Select I/O condition to cut. 2 Click Edit > Cut. 3 Move to the position to paste, click Edit > Paste. 396 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

397 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Copy/Paste I/O condition Perform the following steps to copy/paste an I/O condition. 1 Select I//O condition to copy. 2 Click Edit > Copy. 3 Move to position to paste, click Edit > Paste. Delete I/O condition Perform the following steps to delete an I/O condition. 1 Select I/O condition to delete. 2 Click Edit > Delete. Insert line Perform the following steps to insert a line. 1 Select line to insert. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 397 January 2011 Honeywell

398 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration 2 Click Edit > Insert Line. Delete line Perform the following steps to delete a line. 1 Select the position you want to delete. 2 Click Edit > Delete Line. Single I/O condition In single I/O condition, if execution option is satisfied, copy the value to the selected Address/Channel. In the tree view, click Single I/O Condition. The Single I/O Condition window displays. 398 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

399 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration The field descriptions for Single I/O Condition window are as follows: Field Label Description Use condition Name Description Always execute Execution by button Execution by condition expression View Channel Browser Used to decide whether to use I/O condition. If you do not select this option, SoftMaster-SIM does not use the condition set by user. Used to enter I/O condition s name. Used to enter a description about I/O condition. Regardless of condition set by user, it executes Output Setting when it starts. Executes Output Setting when you press the button. Executes Output Setting when it satisfies the condition expression set by user. Displays channel browser. It is activated when you select the Execution by condition expression. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 399 January 2011 Honeywell

400 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Output Setting Tab: a) Address/Channel: Inputs channel or address name to register. b) Set value: Inputs setting value. Values available are: Address, channel, and constant. Continuous I/O condition In the continuous I/O condition, when the condition is met, enter the value to the selected address/channel in every scan continuously.. In the tree view, click Continuous I/O Condition. The Continuous I/O Condition window displays. The field descriptions for Single I/O Condition window are as follows: 400 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

401 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Use condition Name Description Field Label Always execute Execution by button Execution by condition expression View Channel Browser Description Used to decide whether to use I/O condition. If you do not enable this option, SoftMaster-SIM does not use the condition set by user. Used to enter name of the I/O condition. Used to enter a description of the I/O condition. Regardless of condition set by user, it executes Output Setting when it starts. Used to execute the Output Setting when you press the button. It executes Output Setting when it meets the condition expression set by user. Displays channel browser. It is activated when you select the Execution by condition. Output Setting Tab: Field Label Repeated Execution Ignore Condition while execution Output setting Description Select to enter the output value repeatedly. Select whether to check the operating condition or not. Displays continuous value setting dialog box. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 401 January 2011 Honeywell

402 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration ATTENTION When setting continuous I/O, it writes the value in the continuous value setting to each address/channel. If you set the Ignore Condition during execution, only the first value is written. If Always Execute is set, all the values are written in sequence. And if you set repeated value, it writes value repeatedly. Continuous value no For example, Value not setting Ignore Condition while execution/ not setting Repeated Execution (Execution by button / condition expression is false) not setting Ignore Condition while execution/ not setting Repeated Execution (Always execution / condition is true) setting Ignore Condition while execution / not setting Repeated Execution not setting Ignore Condition while execution / setting Repeated Execution (Execution by button / condition expression is false) SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

403 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration 5 not setting Ignore Condition while execution / setting Repeated Execution (always execution / condition is true) setting Ignore Condition while execution / setting Repeated Execution Continuous value setting dialog box Input setting value Enter the value to set as output value in the continuous I/O condition. The field descriptions for Continuous I/O Condition window are as follows: Field Label Address/channel Value Description Enter the address or channel to set value. Enter only constant such as integer, real, and hexadecimal. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 403 January 2011 Honeywell

404 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Field Label Description OK Cancel Click to saves the changes and to close the dialog box. Click to cancel the changes without saving. Set continuous value Select address or channel to enter continuous value. Perform the following steps to enter a continuous value. 1 Double-click the column to enter address/channel. 2 The Channel/Address Name dialog box appears. 3 Enter address or channel and click OK. The field descriptions for Continuous I/O Condition window are as follows: Field Label Channel/Address Name View Channel Browser OK Cancel Description Used to enter channel or address. Displays the channel browser. Click to save the changes and to close the dialog box. Click to cancel the changes without saving. 404 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

405 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Input value Perform the following steps to enter values. 1 On the Continuous Value Setting dialog box, move the cursor to the position to enter the value. 2 Enter the value. Auto fill Perform the following steps to auto fill. 1 On the Continuous Value Setting dialog box, select the area to be copied. 2 Move the cursor to the corner, cursor changes. 3 Drag the cursor down with left mouse button pressed. ATTENTION If you use control key for auto fill, you can input the value according to mouse drag direction. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 405 January 2011 Honeywell

406 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration I/O condition monitor Start monitoring To start monitoring: On the menu, click Tools > Use single I/O condition or Tools > Use continuous I/O condition. End monitoring To end monitoring: On the menu, Cancel Tools > Use single I/O condition or Tools > Use continuous I/O condition. 406 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

407 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration ATTENTION Program is executed from first step to last step repeatedly and this process is called as scan program. SoftMaster-SIM is also executed through scan and has the following process. Module simulation SoftMaster-SIM supports simple simulation function for the I/O module and special module. In case of digital I/O module, it supports I/O function about I or Q area and in case of special module it supports monitoring function such as analog input or output value monitoring. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 407 January 2011 Honeywell

408 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Setting of module All simulation function in the SoftMaster-SIM uses information set in the I/O parameter. Hence, ensure that you set each module in the I/O parameter to simulate module and reflect it to program. For example, in order to simulate the following PLC system, set the I/O parameter as follows: Base Slot Module name Module type Basic base 0 2MLI-D21A Basic base 1 2MLF-AV8A Basic base 2 2MLF-HO2A DC 2 4V input 8 points Voltage type A/D conversion module (8 channels) Open collector type highspeed module (2 channels) After executing the SoftMaster-SIM, the module set in the I/O parameter displays as follows in System Monitoring. 408 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

409 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Digital I/O module ATTENTION To apply I/O parameter set in the SoftMaster, download I/O parameter to SoftMaster-SIM. In case the module has been changed, re-launch SoftMaster-SIM module and execute the SoftMaster-SIM again. In the digital I/O module s simulation, you can change contact point s current value or check if output is normal. According to I/O module setting in I/O parameter, it has the following characteristics. Modification of input value Modification of output value Not Setting I/O module Modification of the monitor current value is available. Not available Setting I/O Module Modification of the SoftMaster-SIM channel value is available. Not available Forced I/O input Not applied Applied Not applied Applied Analog input module (A/D conversion module) SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog input module. Module Name Support 2MLF-AV8A (Voltage type 8 channel) 2MLF-AC8A (Current type 8 channel) 2MLF-AD4S (Isolation type 4 channel) Ⅹ SoftMaster-SIM supports four types of input voltage range and digital data output format and two types of input current range. It is as follows. Input Voltage Range Input Current Range Digital Data Output Format 1 ~ 5V 4 ~ 20mA 0 ~ ~ 5V 0 ~ 20mA ~ 8000 R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 409 January 2011 Honeywell

410 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Input Voltage Range Input Current Range Digital Data Output Format 0 ~ 10V ~ ~ 10V - 0 ~ (%) SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog input parameters. Parameter Support Parameter Support Operation channel Filter constant Input voltage(current) range Filter process Output data type Average method Filter process Ⅹ Average value You can set analog input value in the SoftMaster-SIM window and input range is effective within voltage (current) set in parameter. ATTENTION For the analog module s parameter setting and how to use the program, refer to the user s guide of each module. You can set the analog input value in the SoftMaster-SIM window. Analog output module (D/A conversion module) SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog output module. Module Name Support 2MLF-DV4A (Voltage type 4 channel) 2MLF -DV8A (Voltage type 8 channel) 2MLF -DC4A (Current type 4 channel) 2MLF -DC8A (Current type 8 channel) 410 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

411 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Module Name Support 2MLF -DV4S (Isolation type voltage output 4 channel) 2MLF -DC4S (Isolation type current output 4 channel) Ⅹ Ⅹ SoftMaster-SIM supports the following voltage (current) range and input data type. Input Data Type Output Voltage Range Output Current Range 0 ~ ~ 5V 4 ~ 20mA ~ ~ 5V 0 ~ 20mA 1000 ~ ~ 10V - 0 ~ (%) -10 ~ 10V - SoftMaster-SIM supports the following analog output parameter. Parameter Support Operation channel Output voltage (current) range Input data type Channel output status Ⅹ You can input digital input value through special module variable and it is effective within the range set in the parameter. ATTENTION For analog output module s parameter and how to use the program, refer to the user s guide of each module. You can check the changed analog output value in the SoftMaster-SIM window s channel item. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 411 January 2011 Honeywell

412 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration High-speed counter module (HSC Module) The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following high-speed counter module. Module Name Support 2MLF -HO2A (Open collector 2 channel) 2MLF -HD2A (Open driver 2 channel) The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following high-speed counter parameter. Parameter Support Parameter Support Count mode Ⅹ Comparison output 0 maximum setting value Pulse input mode Ⅹ Comparison output 1 minimum setting value Preset Comparison output 0 maximum setting value Ring counter minimum value Ⅹ Output status setting Ring counter maximum value Ⅹ Additional function mode Ⅹ Comparison output 0 mode Section setting value (ms) Ⅹ Comparison output 1 mode Pulse number per 1 cycle Ⅹ Comparison output 0 minimum setting value Frequency display mode Ⅹ 412 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

413 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration ATTENTION For parameter specific contents of high-speed counter module and how to use the program, refer to the user s guide of each module. In the SoftMaster-SIM window s channel item, you can change current count value. High-speed counter simulation, compare the input count value with parameter setting value and use it as comparison output signal. RTD module The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following RTD module. Module Name Support 2MLF -RD4A (4 channel) 2MLF -RD4S (Isolation type 4 channels) 2MLF -TC4S (Isolation type 4 channels) Ⅹ Ⅹ The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following temperature input parameter. Parameter Support Parameter Support Operation channel Process Alarm High-High Limit Ⅹ Sensor type Process Alarm High Limit Ⅹ Temperature unit Process Alarm Low Limit Ⅹ Filter constant Ⅹ Process Alarm Low-Low Limit Ⅹ Average process Ⅹ Process Alarm Hysteresis Ⅹ Average value Ⅹ Input variation alarm setting type Ⅹ Scaling data type Ⅹ Input variation alarm Upper Limit Ⅹ R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 413 January 2011 Honeywell

414 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Parameter Support Parameter Support Scaling minimum value Ⅹ Input variation alarm Lower Limit Ⅹ Scaling maximum value Ⅹ Input variation alarm detection Cycle Ⅹ ATTENTION For parameter specific content of RTD module and how to use the program, refer to the user s guide of each module. You can set temperature input value in the SoftMaster-SIM window s channel item. Advanced positioning module (APM module) ATTENTION In the SoftMaster-SIM, it cannot support the full function of APM function. The APM module of SoftMaster-SIM is made to help you understand the function block related with APM and its program operation and error may be different with real PLC. SoftMaster-SIM supports part of error related with APM, some error may occur in real PLC. The following is APM function block list that SoftMaster-SIM supports. For position module supported by SoftMaster-SIM, refer to the following table. Module Name Support 2MLF -PO1A (Open collector 1 axis) 2MLF -PO2A (Open collector 2 axis) 2MLF -PO3A (Open Collector 3 axis) 2MLF -PD1A (Line Driver 1 axis) 414 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

415 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Module Name Support 2MLF -PD2A (Line Driver 2 axis) 2MLF -PD3A (Line Driver 3 axis) The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following step data parameter (X/Y/Z axis). Parameter Support Parameter Support Coordinate Ⅹ Circular interpolation sub address [pulse] Ⅹ Control method M code Ⅹ Operation pattern ACC/DEC Number Ⅹ Operation method Ⅹ Operation speed Target position [pulse] Dwell time Ⅹ Circular interpolation direction Ⅹ - - The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following operating parameter (X/Y/Z axis). Parameter type Item Support Basic parameter Bias speed Extension parameter External command selection External command External stop External contemporary start External speed/position conversion Origin/manual parameter Origin address X Home high speed Home low speed X X Origin/Manual parameter JOG high speed R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 415 January 2011 Honeywell

416 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Parameter type Item Support JOG low speed Inching speed The SoftMaster-SIM supports the following APM exclusive function block. Function Block Command Support APM_ORG Homing start X APM_FLT Floating origin setting APM_DST Direct start APM_IST Indirect start APM_LIN Linear interpolation start X APM_CIN Circular interpolation start X APM_SST Simultaneous start APM_VTP Speed/position conversion X APM_PTV Position/speed conversion X APM_STP Stop APM_SKP Skip operation APM_SSP Position sync. X APM_SSS Speed sync. APM_POR Position override APM_SOR Speed override APM_PSO Speed override with position X APM_NMV Continuous operation APM_INCH Inching start APM_RTP Manual operation previous location return 416 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

417 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration Function Block Command Support APM_SNS APM_SRS Start step number modification Repeated step number modification APM_MOF M code off APM_PRS Current position preset APM_ZONE ZONE output allowance APM_EPRS Encoder preset Teaching function block - X APM_EMG Emergency stop APM_CLR Error reset APM_PST Point operation X APM_PWR Point operation step data setting X APM_SRD Read current status APM_CRD Read operation status code information APM_ENCRD Read encoder value X APM_JOG JOG start X APM_MPG Manual pulse operation X The following is APM command error code in the SoftMaster-SIM. Error code Meaning 151 Operating data s operating speed cannot be set as Direct start command cannot be executed during operation. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 417 January 2011 Honeywell

418 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration 224 Error code Meaning Direct start command cannot be executed in the absolute coordinate of zero point non-determination status. 231 Indirect start command cannot be executed during operation Indirect start command cannot be executed in the absolute coordinate of zero point non-determination status. Contemporary start command cannot be executed during operation. Contemporary start command cannot be executed in the absolute coordinate of zero point non-determination status. Decreased speed stop command can be executed during operation. 331 Skip command can be executed during operation There is an error in the setting of speed synchronous command s master/slave axis. There is an error in the setting of speed synchronous command s master/slave axis rate. 361 Position override command can be executed during operation. 371 Speed override command can be executed during operation. 391 Continuous operation command can be executed during operation. 401 Inching command cannot be executed during operation Auto operation point return command cannot be executed during operation. Start step number modification command cannot be executed during operation. 461 Position teaching command cannot be executed during operation. 481 Inner emergency stop. 418 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

419 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration ATTENTION Positioning module specific parameter is set in the APM package. To set parameter used in the positioning module, set operating parameter in the APM package and save project file as follows. And APM project file should be in the SoftMaster project file folder. BxSyz.apm (x base number, yz slot number, no distinction between small and capital letters). Base Slot Project Storage Name 0 0 B0S0.apm 0 10 B0S10.apm 1 0 B1S0.apm 1 11 B1S11.apm 2 0 B2S0.apm 2 12 B2S12.apm For specific parameter setting of APM module, refer to the APM package user s guide. You can check APM module s status in the SoftMaster-SIM window s channel item. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 419 January 2011 Honeywell

420 17. SoftMaster Simulator Program window configuration ATTENTION Meaning of channel name of positioning module is as follows: (Example: X axis standard) Channel Name XCurrentPosH XCurrentPosL XCurrentVelH XCurrentVelL Meaning Upper 16 bit among X- axis current position value Lower16 bit among X- axis current position value Upper 16 bit among X- axis current speed value Lower 16 bit among X- axis current speed value 420 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

421 17. SoftMaster Simulator Limitations 17.3 Limitations SoftMaster-SIM has the following limitations in comparison with real PLC. Watchdog timer In 2MLI PLC, you can set watchdog timer to prevent error. But in SoftMaster-SIM, it does not work properly because scan time in SoftMaster-SIM is longer than that in PLC. Communication module SoftMaster-SIM does not support function related with communication module. So the following function block does not work and is saved in SoftMaster-SIM. Category Name Function Station address setting P2PSN Sets other station address Reading area setting (BOOL) Reading area setting (BYTE) Reading area setting (WORD) Reading area setting (DWORD) Reading area setting (LWORD) Writing area setting (BOOL) Writing area setting (BYTE) Writing area setting (WORD) Writing area setting (DWORD) Writing area setting (LWORD) P2PRD_BOOL P2PRD_BYTE P2PRD_WORD P2PRD_DWORD P2PRD_LWORD P2PWR_BOOL P2PWR_BYTE P2PWR_WORD P2PWR_DWORD P2PWR_LWORD Sets BIT data reading area Sets BYTE data reading area Sets WORD data reading area Sets DWORD data reading area Sets LWORD data reading area Sets BIT data writing area Sets BYTE data writing area Sets WORD data writing area Sets DWORD data writing area Sets LWORD data writing area R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 421 January 2011 Honeywell

422 17. SoftMaster Simulator Limitations 422 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

423 18.1 Writing ST program 18. ST Edition ST based on character is a program language and conforms to IEC Scan program, user function/fb, SFC can be written by ST language. Adding scan program Perform the following steps to add a scan program. 1 Select Scan Program in the project window. 2 Click Project > Add item > Program. The Program window displays. 3 Select Language as ST, enter program name and description. Adding user function/function block Perform the following steps to add a user function/function block. 1 Select User Function/Function Block in the project window. 2 Click Project > Add Item > Function or Function Block. The User Function/Function Block window displays. 3 Enter the name and description. Select ST as Language. In case of Function, select Return data type. Adding SFC transition, action Adding SFC transition Perform the following steps to add transition. 1 Select the transition in which you want to input program in SFC program. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 423 January 2011 Honeywell

424 18. ST Edition Writing ST program 2 After you select the transition, double-click or press Enter. The Transition Properties window displays. 3 Enter the name and comment. 4 Select Type as Program. 5 Select Language as ST in Add Program window. Perform the following steps to add an action. 1 Enter the Name and Comment. 2 Select Type as Program in the Properties window. 3 Select Language as ST in the Add Program window. 424 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

425 18. ST Edition Limit 18.2 Limit When editing ST language, the limit is as described below. Item Content Limit Maximum number of character in one line Maximum number of character in one line is 2048 for English and 1024 for Korean ATTENTION Only one scan program is available. Language of User Function/Function Block, SFC transition and action can be different from language of scan program. Program written in other languages cannot be converted Editing program Shortcut keys The followings are the shortcut keys. You can change shortcut key using Tools > Shortcut key Settings. Shortcut Key Description Copy Ctrl + C Copies selected character string. Paste Ctrl + V Pastes copied character string. Delete Del Deletes selected character string. Cut Ctrl + X Copies selected character string and deletes it. Undo Ctrl + Z Cancels the changes. Redo Ctrl + Y Cancels Redo action. Select All Ctrl + A Selects all character strings. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 425 January 2011 Honeywell

426 18. ST Edition Editing program Copy/paste Copies selected character string into clipboard and pastes it. Perform the following steps to copy and paste the character string. 1 Select the character string to copy. 2 Click Edit > Copy. 3 Move to location to paste the copied character string. 4 Click Edit > Paste. ATTENTION Clipboard: memory area of PC to save temporary information. When parting, if you select the area, the character string is overwritten and if you do not select the area, it is inserted. Only text is pasted. Undo/redo Undo cancels edition and Redo cancels Undo action. Perform the following steps to do Undo and Redo actions. 1 After executing Paste, click Edit > Undo. Pasted contents are deleted. 2 Click Edit > Redo. Paste action is executed again. 426 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

427 18. ST Edition Editing program Adding/selecting variable Enter a variable at the selected location. Perform the following steps to add or select variable. 1 After moving the cursor, click Edit > Select/Add Variable. The Select Variable window displays. The field description for Select Variable window are as follows: Field Label Variable Local variable Direct variable Flag List All Parameter number Block index Global Variable New Variable Edit Variable Delete Variable Description Enter the name of direct variable or declared variable. If the entered character string is variable type and is not registered as variable, Variable Addition/Edit dialog box appears. Displays the declared local variable list. Displays direct variable comment. Displays flag in the list. Type of flag list can be selected in List. Displays type of flag list. There is system/highspeed link/p2p/pid. Select whether to display only flags related with Parameter number, Block index or not. Enter number to sort flags. 0~12 for highspeed link, 0~12 for P2P, 0~63 for PID. Enter number to sort flags. 0~127 for highspeed link, 0~63 for P2P. Displays global variable list. It is available to register as EXTERNAL variable. Invokes a dialog box to add variable to local variable list. Invokes a dialog box to edit the selected variable. Deletes the selected local variable from local variable list. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 427 January 2011 Honeywell

428 18. ST Edition Editing program OK Cancel Click to saves the entered or selected items and to close the dialog box. Click to closes the dialog box. When you select, add a new variable. The Variable Name Add window displays. The field description for Variable Name Add window are as follows: Field Label Variable Data Type Variable Kind Address Initial Value Trigger Retain Description Description Enter variable name. Selects data type of variable. Selects variable Kind of variable. Assigns direct address about variable. Enter initial value of variable. Select trigger status about variable. Select retain status about variable. Enter description about variable. 2 Inserts variable at the cursor location. ATTENTION If you select Select/Add Variable with cursor placed in the empty area, you can add new variable. If you select Select/Add Variable after selecting character string, the character string is replaced into variable. Inserting function/function block Insert Function/Function Block at the cursor location. Perform the following steps to insert function or function block. 1 Move the cursor to insert. 2 Click Edit > Function/FB. The Function/Function Block window displays. 428 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

429 18. ST Edition Editing program The field description for Function/Function Block window are as follows: Field Label Name Search List Category Function List Function Information OK Cancel Description Enters name of Function (Block) to use. Searches Function (Block) about the entered name. Used for sorting Function, Function Block. Indicates category of Function (Block). Displays list of Function (Block) in the selected category. Displays information of Function (Block). In case of Function, it is available to set properties about input parameter. In case of Function Block, it is available to set instance name and instance class. Click to save the changes and to close the window. Click to closes the window. 3 Function/Function Block is inserted. ATTENTION I/O parameters of function/function block are not inserted automatically. Additionally, you should edit them. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 429 January 2011 Honeywell

430 18. ST Edition Viewing program 18.4 Viewing program It describes about display properties in the ST program. ST option Perform the following steps to view ST option. 1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays. 2 Select ST. The field description for Options window are as follows: Field Label Parameter information Auto list members Auto macro statement Tab size Show tip text Auto indent Enhance Description When inserting Function/FB, example text of IO parameter is added. When you insert character string by keyboard, variable or Function/FB starting with same character displays. When you insert the control text of ST (IF, WHILE, SWITCH), control text is completed according to ST grammar. Enters tab size. When cursor is on the character string in ST program, description of character string displays. When changing line with ENTER, indent is applied automatically with same tab size of previous line. Character string used in ST program displays with various colors according to variable, comment, Function (Block). 430 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

431 18. ST Edition Viewing program Font/color It is used for designating the font or color in the ST program. Perform the following steps to change the font in the ST program. 1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays. 2 Select ST > Font/Color. 3 Change Font. ATTENTION You cannot change the character size. Default font is Fixedsys. Perform the following steps to change the color in the ST program. 1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays. 2 Select ST > font/color. 3 Change color. Zoom Tab ST program does not support Zoom function. When using Tab, Tab size is designated. Perform the following steps to change the tab size. 1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays. 2 Select ST. 3 Select Change Tab size. For tab size 4, the screen is as follows: R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 431 January 2011 Honeywell

432 18. ST Edition Viewing program ATTENTION Default tab size is 4. Range of tab size is 1~100. Showing line numbers Shows/hides line numbers in the ST program. Perform the following steps to show line numbers. 1 Click Tools > Options. The Options window displays. 2 Select SoftMaster Common Editor. 3 Check Show line numbers. 432 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

433 18. ST Edition Additional edit functions 18.5 Additional edit functions This section describes additional edition functions. Book mark You can set and remove the bookmarks. Setting bookmark Perform the following steps to set the bookmark. 1 Move the cursor to set bookmark. 2 Click Edit > Bookmark > Set/Remove. Removing bookmark Perform the following steps to remove the bookmark. 1 Move the cursor to remove bookmark. 2 Click Edit > Bookmark > Set/Remove. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 433 January 2011 Honeywell

434 18. ST Edition Additional edit functions Removing all bookmark To remove the bookmark: Click Edit > Bookmark > Remove All. Previous bookmark To go to previous bookmark: Click Edit > Bookmark > Previous Bookmark. Next bookmark To go to next bookmark: Click Edit > Bookmark > Next Bookmark. ATTENTION Bookmark is set by line unit. Undo/Redo cannot cancel action about bookmark. Selection from character string list When entering character string, it displays the character string starting with same character string and you need to select the character string properly. Perform the following steps to select character string. 434 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

435 18. ST Edition Additional edit functions 1 Enter character string by keyboard. 2 Select character string from list. 3 Press Enter or double-click the character string. ATTENTION Following are the descriptions of character string list bit map. 1. : ST language key word (IF, CASE WHILE, and so on.) 2. : Variable name 3. : Flag variable name 4. : Function name R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 435 January 2011 Honeywell

436 18. ST Edition Additional edit functions 5. : Function block instance name 6. : User-defined function name 7. : User-defined function block instance name Selecting member variable from character string list It is used for selecting member variable from character string list by name of FB or user data type instance. Perform the following steps to select member variable from character string list. 1 Enter. after name of FB or user data type instance. For example, instance name of TON is TON_Inst. 2 Select member variable to input. 3 Press Enter or double-click. Setting/removing block mask Sets or removes the Block Mask area. The Block Mask area is not executed. Block Mask area is indicated by symbol (* and *). 436 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

437 18. ST Edition Additional edit functions Setting block mask Perform the following steps to set block mask. 1 Select area to set Block Mask. 2 Click Edit > Set/Remove Block Mask. Removing block mask Perform the following steps to remove block mask. 1 Select area in which Block Mask is already set. 2 Click Edit > Set/Remove Block Mask. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 437 January 2011 Honeywell

438 18. ST Edition Additional edit functions Setting/removing line block mask Selected line is not executed. Symbol // Is used to set Line Block Mask. Setting line block mask Perform the following steps to set line block mask. 1 Select area to set line block mask. 2 Click Edit > Set/Remove Line Block Mask. 438 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

439 18. ST Edition Additional edit functions Removing line block mask Perform the following steps to remove line block mask. 1 Select area to remove line block mask. 2 Click Edit > Set/Remove Line Block Mask. Indent/outdent Enables you to indent/outdent at the selected area. Indent Perform the following steps to indent. 1 Select area to indent. 2 Press TAB. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 439 January 2011 Honeywell

440 18. ST Edition Additional edit functions Outdent Perform the following steps to outdent. 1 Select area to outdent. 2 Press Shift + TAB. 440 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

441 19.1 Overview 19. Event Input Module The 2MLF-SOEA Module (event input module) is used for recording of events entered from outside. The event input module is a data recording device which can record event information (time and state) in 1ms resolution. The event input module is not a program device or external device used in the CPU. Using the SOE monitor, the event input is available only for monitoring and file saving. 2MLK/I/R CPU: saves 3000 events at maximum (Up to 3000 events can be saved in the order of occurrence.) 2MLF-SOEA module: save 300 events at maximum. Characteristics of SOE monitor 1. This is a software package for the operation and monitoring of the 2MLF-SOEA module of 2MLT series. 2. This package provides a function that enables independent operation of the SOE monitor, regardless of the SoftMaster. 3. This enables data monitoring and saving. Functions of the SOE monitor The SOE monitor is an exclusive software package which runs on a PC platform and communicates with the CPU of ML200 series for easy and fast operation of 2MLF- SOEA. The major functions of the SOE monitor are as follows: 1. Read/save event history 2. Delete event history 3. View module parameter setting 4. Save event history in an Excel file R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 441 January 2011 Honeywell

442 19. Event Input Module Screen configuration Files created in the SOE monitor When you create and edit a project, the files having the extensions below are created. <Name>.set: the log file for the event the user has created. This file is created for saving the event. <Name>.xls: the module event file created by the user. Event record is saved in an Excel file Screen configuration This section describes the basic screen elements, windows and pop-up menus. On the Monitor menu, click SOE Monitoring in the SoftMaster monitor state. The following window displays. 442 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

443 19. Event Input Module Screen configuration Field Description Menu Tools SOE Event monitor window Status bar Basic menu is provided for using the software program. Menu can be easily selected and executed with toolbar. Shows the elements of the current project. Shows the event information of the module selected in the project. Shows the information of the event and connected PLC. Menu structure File If you select a menu item, commands appear. The commands can be executed with mouse or keyboard. Some menus provide shortcut keys. Command Description New logging session Open logging Save logging as Export to file Exit Creates the project. Opens an existing log file. Saves the log file with a different file name. Saves the current log data in an Excel file. Ends the SOE monitor. View Command All Event Filtering Newest First Oldest First Compare Event Find event Description Shows all hidden events in an activated window. Shows only the events meeting the filtering criteria. Shows the data in the order of recent to old in the monitor window. Shows the data in the order of old to recent in the monitor window. Compares the events. Searches the desired event. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 443 January 2011 Honeywell

444 19. Event Input Module Screen configuration Command Module Property Description Shows parameter setting (in online operation) Online Command Connect/Disconnect Connection setting Description Connects or disconnects from the PLC. Sets up access method. Clear PLC Event History Deletes the event data saved in the PLC CPU memory. Clear SOE Module Event History Clear all SOE Module History Refresh Event Download SOE O/S Deletes the event data saved in the SOE module memory. Deletes all the event data saved in the memory of the SOE module in the PLC system. Loads the event data of the SOE module. Downloads the O/S files to SOE module. Tool Option Customize Command Description User can configure SOE monitor environment for user convenience. User defines tools and commands. Window Command New window Cascade Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Description Opens a new window in the activated window. Arranges the windows in the SoftMaster in cascade layout. Arranges the windows in the SoftMaster in horizontal layout. Arranges the windows in the SoftMaster in vertical layout. 444 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

445 19. Event Input Module Screen configuration Close all Command Description Closes all the windows of the SoftMaster. Help Command About SOE monitoring Description Provides the information on the SOE monitor. Tools Frequently used menu items are provided with respective shortcut keys (icons).you can click the icon to execute the menu. Perform the following steps to create a new toolbar. 1 On the Tools menu, click Customize. The Customize window displays. 2 Click New. The New Toolbar dialog box appears. 3 Enter tool name. 4 Click OK. A toolbar without tool creates. The field description for Customize window are as follows: Field Toolbars New Description Select/clear the check box to make the toolbar appear/disappear. Creates a new toolbar. Reset Initialize the toolbar. 5 Select the Command tab. 6 Click OK to create a toolbar. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 445 January 2011 Honeywell

446 19. Event Input Module Screen configuration SOE event history window The SOE monitor displays the 2MLF-SOEA module SOE event history window automatically when connected with PLC CPU. Double-click the desired module to run the event monitor window. Status bar CPU event history: Select the event saved in the CPU module. Module event history: Select the event saved in the SOE module. Double-click the CPU event history or module event history to activate the event monitor window. The following figure displays the status bar of SOE Monitoring window. Event No.: Shows the number of the events in the event monitor window. PLC name: Shows the name of the PLC connected with the SOE monitor. 446 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

447 19. Event Input Module Basic parameter setting Online: Shows the PLC connection status of the SOE monitor Basic parameter setting Setting items Basic parameters of the 2MLF-SOEA can be set up using the menu or toolbar of the SoftMaster. Sets up the method of saving the history occurred in the 2MLF-SOEA module in the CPU module. In the project tree, click Parameter > Basic Parameter. The Basic Parameter Settings window appears. Save the latest SOE events: Used for saving the most recent event. If there are more than 3000 events, the oldest event is deleted and the new event is saved. Save the first SOE events: Used to maintain the first event. If there are more than 3000 events, no new events will be saved I/O parameter setting Setting item I/O parameters of the 2MLF-SOEA can be set up using the menu or toolbar of the SoftMaster. It sets up the method of saving the external event history in the 2MLF-SOEA module. Perform the following steps to set I/O parameter. 1 In the project tree, click Parameter > I/O Parameter. The I/O Parameter Setting window displays. 2 In the I/O Parameter Setting window, click the slot of the base where the module is mounted. In the example below, the 2MLF-SOEA module is at #4 slot, #0 base. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 447 January 2011 Honeywell

448 19. Event Input Module I/O parameter setting 3 In the I/O Parameter Setting window, select the desired module from the drop-down arrow. 4 After selecting the module, click Details. The SOE Module window displays. The field description for the SOE Module window are as follows: 448 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

449 19. Event Input Module I/O parameter setting Field Input Filter Description Sets up the time which enables an event to be identified as an effective input data. (Setting range: 1ms ~ 100ms) SOE History Reset with recent history: used to save the most recent events. If the events exceed 300, the oldest event is deleted and the last one is saved. Retain initial history: used to retain the initial event. If the events exceed 300, the last one will not be saved. Event setting details Set up the input condition of the event. Type: Rise, Fall or simultaneously, Rise/Fall of event can be set up. Event conditions can be set up for each input contact point. Chattering: Abnormal signals not related with event can be processed as chattering. (Setting range: 2~127) Example of input filter setting Condition is as follows: Input filter: 1ms Detail event setting: Rise/Fall events simultaneously Sequence diagram of event occurrence is as follows: R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 449 January 2011 Honeywell

450 19. Event Input Module I/O parameter setting Chatter setting Setting items Chatter setting enables the module to identify an event repeated many times during a short period of time as chattering, and not an effective event. Some sensors using mechanical contacts may cause chattering, which can be eliminated with this function. 1. Number of events: 2~127 ( 0 : detection is disabled) 2. Event number: Enter the number of the events including the first effective signal (minimum 2) 3. Chatter detection time (duration): If the chatter detection time is passed from the time the first effective event was detected, the chatter detection function for the specific event frequency is terminated, even if the set-up number of chattering is not completed. 4. Minimum chatter detection time (duration): Co-related with the set up chattering event number. 450 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

451 19. Event Input Module View module information In addition, since an event has passed the input filter, it should satisfy following criteria: (Number of Events Input Filter Value) < Chatter Detection Time (Duration) or Input Filter Value < (Chatter Detection Time (Duration) / Number of Events) For example: If, chatter detection time = 30ms, number of chattering events = 5, 30ms 5 = 6ms, Therefore, the input filter must be less than 6ms. Example of chatter setting Condition: Input filter: 1ms Detail event setting: Rise event Chatter event: 4 Chatter time: 8ms Sequence diagram of event occurrence is as follows: R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 451 January 2011 Honeywell

452 19. Event Input Module View module information Chatter time measurement: begins from the recognition of an event Two of the four events passing the filter are ignored by chatter detection function. The last event which enters after expiration of the chatter detection time is recorded normally as the first event of a new period View module information SoftMaster supports viewing event input module information. Perform the following steps to view module information. 1 Click Online > Connect. After connecting to PLC, click Online > I/O Information. The I/O information window displays. 2 Click Details. The module 2MLF-SOEA information displays Event history monitor The events entered into the CPU and event input modules can be monitored with the SOE monitor. Perform the following steps to monitor event input modules with SOE monitor. 1 Click Online > Connect. The SOE Monitoring menu is activated only after connecting to PLC. 2 Click Monitor > SOE Monitoring. The SOE Monitoring window appears. 3 From the SOE Monitoring window, click Online > Connect. The information of the event input module in the connected system displays. 4 CPU Event History: the event history stored in the CPU module. Module Event History: the event history stored in the SOEA module. Double-click the CPU event history or module event history to activate the event monitor window. 5 Double-click CPU Event History and click Online > Refresh Event. 6 Double-click Module Event History and click Online > Refresh Event. 452 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

453 19. Event Input Module Event history monitor 7 Event history information: 8 Click View > All Event to search and compare all events. 9 Click View > Filtering to search the behavior of a specific event. The Event Filtering window displays. The field description for Event Filtering window are as follows: Field Specify Event Occurred Position Event type Show SOE installed position only Base/Slot Begin/End Description Specify the bit at which the event has occurred. Specify the input condition at which the event has occurred. Used only for CPU event history filtering. Only the base and slot of event input module appears. Used only for CPU event history filtering. Specifies base and slot. Specify the event filter with the time and the first event, and the last event. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 453 January 2011 Honeywell

454 19. Event Input Module Event history monitor Example of event filter Event occurrence point filter setting: Filtering result: #0 bit Event occurrence point setting: No. 0 bit Rise Event Event type setting: Rise event. You can also filter events based on Base and Occurred time. Prioritizing events Priority to the recent events: the recent events have priority over the old events in the display list. Priority to old events: the old events have priority over the recent events in the display list. 454 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

455 19. Event Input Module Event history monitor To view the recent events first, click View > Newest First. From recent to older events To view the old events first, click View > Oldest First. From old to recent events R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 455 January 2011 Honeywell

456 19. Event Input Module Save as an excel file Comparing events Compare the events stored in the CPU and event input modules and show the result. To compare the events, click View > Compare Event. Deleting event history Delete CPU history: the history stored in the CPU module is deleted. To delete CPU history: Click Online > Clear PLC Event History To delete the history stored in the module: Click Online > Clear SOE Module Event History To delete the history stored in all the SOEA modules: Click Online > Clear All SOE module History 456 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

457 19. Event Input Module Save as an excel file 19.7 Save as an excel file This section describes how to save an event file as an excel file. Perform the following steps to save an event file as an excel file. 1 Select the event history to be converted into an Excel file in the event monitor window. 2 Click File > Export to file. 3 Enter a new file name in the Save As dialog box. 4 Click Save to create a new Excel file. ATTENTION The conversion to an Excel file is effective only for the currently active main screen (one window). 5 Open file in the Excel application (to read the saved event file in Excel). R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 457 January 2011 Honeywell

458 19. Event Input Module Save as an excel file 458 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

459 20. Dedicated ML200R Function 20.1 Redundancy parameter Redundancy parameter is configured for redundant operation. Redundant parameter configuration is classified into operation mode setting and data synchronization area setting. Unlike the other parameters, redundancy parameter can be changed during operation and modified parameter is synchronized between the master and the standby CPU, as soon as the parameters are written to the PLC. Note that you must use the Write to PLC function, to download the modified parameter. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 459 January 2011 Honeywell

460 20. Dedicated ML200R Function Redundancy parameter Redundancy parameter Contents Operation Hot Swapping Option Extended Base Power Failure Setup Warning Option Switching condition Redundancy Synchronization Area Base Module Restart and wait Base power failure error Disable warning for single power operation Disable warning for ring topology Disable warning for single CPU mode Disable warning message for fault mask removal Disconnection of the cable Disconnection of the server connection I/Q Base Though base error occurs in normal RUN mode, system operates except for the base. And, if that base is restored, it operates normally. Though module is disabled, module detachment error does not appear. If that module is enabled, it operates normally. When two power modules of expansion base are off, system is into WAIT mode (Ebxx). When two power modules of expansion base are off, CPU error appears. Disables warning message when one of the power modules in expansion base is off. Disables warning message when ring topology is failed. Disables warning message when the project requires only master CPU without redundant operation. Disables warning message when fault mask is removed. When the cable is disconnected, it is instantly switched within 1s. Master automatic switchover (redundancy operation) When Master/Standby is acting as FEnet server, if the cable of the Master is disconnected, Standby becomes Master. It synchronizes the data of I/Q Base data. It can set from the first base to the final base. Select the check box, to determine whether to synchronize the I/Q area or not. If you select the check box, it synchronizes from first base to final base. The default value is 0~31 base. 460 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

461 20. Dedicated ML200R Function Redundancy parameter Redundancy parameter Contents Operation M Area R Area W Area PID Block It synchronizes data of M area. It can set from the position of first word to the position of final word. Select the check box, to determine whether to synchronize the M area or not. If you select the check box, it synchronizes from first area to final area. The default value is %MW0~%MW2000. It synchronizes data of R area. It can set from the position of first word to the position of final word. Select the check box, to determine whether to synchronize the R area or not. If you select the check box, it synchronizes from first area to final area. The default value is %RW0~%RW2000. If R area is set, synchronization area of W defines automatically. It synchronizes data of PID block. It can set from the first block to final block. Select the check box, to determine whether to synchronize the PID block area or not. If you select the check box, it synchronizes from block area to final block area. The default value is 0 block. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 461 January 2011 Honeywell

462 20. Dedicated ML200R Function Redundancy PLC state window 20.2 Redundancy PLC state window Redundancy PLC state window appears automatically when SoftMaster connects with 2MLR PLC. The following table describes the fields in the Redundancy PLC state window. Field Description a b c d e f g h i j k l Project name of SoftMaster or Program name of SoftMaster- NM/System Monitor. A-side PLC Run mode. A-side PLC Warning: No display if warning does not exist. A-side PLC error: No display if error does not exist. Standby CPU image: Shaded PLC. CPU status display: Standby, A-side. Signal line: 1 line Bus topology, 2 lines Ring topology. CPU status display: Master, B-side. B-side PLC error: No display if warning does not exist. B-side PLC warning: No display if error does not exist. B-side PLC Run mode. Master CPU image: Colored PLC. 462 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

463 20. Dedicated ML200R Function Control redundancy 20.3 Control redundancy To control redundancy: Click Online > Control Redundancy. Change of master CPU The following table describes the fields in the Redundancy control window. Field Description Master CPU You can do a switchover the Master CPU Change Display of Master CPU, A-side or B-side. It displays state of redundancy changeable state. If it is disabled, it displays the possible case to make redundancy change. Redundancy change command. If redundancy change is not disabled, it displays inactive mode. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 463 January 2011 Honeywell

464 20. Dedicated ML200R Function Control redundancy ATTENTION The redundancy state is changeable: 1. When the Master CPU is in stop mode. 2. When the Master CPU has error. 3. When the redundancy system is in run mode. Standby CPU control The following table describes the fields of the Standby CPU in the Redundancy Control window. Field Description a b c The Standby CPU is available: Available Standby CPU state Standby CPU mode: Standby CPU Run/Stop mode change Standby CPU mode: Only Standby CPU Reset or Overall reset 464 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

465 20. Dedicated ML200R Function System monitoring 20.4 System monitoring System configuration and base information displays in System Monitoring window. System configuration To perform system configuration: Click PLC > System Configuration. System configuration contains below information: R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 465 January 2011 Honeywell

466 20. Dedicated ML200R Function System monitoring 1. Connection state between base. 2. Connection cable type between base. 3. In case of electric cable, it displays measured time and distance. 4. It displays data synchronization cable between Master and Standby CPU. 5. It displays base information of selected base (click mouse button or press enter key). Node count change Node Count Change enables you to decide how many nodes displays in window. To change Node Count: Click View > Node Count, then select node among [2], [3], [4], [5], [6]. Default setting value is 2. To view node count [2]: click View > Node Count - [2]. 466 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

467 20. Dedicated ML200R Function System monitoring To view node count [4], click View > Node Count - [4]. Base information It displays base information installed in base. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 467 January 2011 Honeywell

468 20. Dedicated ML200R Function System monitoring Master/standby base The above diagram displays the following: 1. It displays information and base number of CPU module. 2. State indicator: It indicates state of CPU. 3. RING: If it consist of Ring topology, LED indicates On. 4. RED: If it is operated by Redundancy operation, LED indicates On. 5. MASTER: If it is in master mode, LED is On. 6. CPU-A: If CPU-A is On, LED indicates On. 7. CPU-B: If CPU-B is On, LED indicates On. 8. RUN: If operation mode is Run mode, LED indicates On. 9. STOP: If operation mode is Stop mode, LED indicates On. 10. WAR: Warning occurs in CPU, LED indicates On. 11. ERR: Error is occurs in CPU, LED indicates On. 12. Key state: Key state information of CPU. 468 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

469 20. Dedicated ML200R Function System monitoring Expansion base It displays base number of expansion module. Base information 1. Base information contains the information of base connection and cable. 2. By selecting expansion drive module/expansion manager and PLC > Module Information, Base information displays. 3. Double-click the expansion drive module/expansion manager, the base information displays. The above diagram displays the following: 1. Base Number: Base number which is set in the switch of base setting for expansion drive module. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 469 January 2011 Honeywell

470 20. Dedicated ML200R Function System monitoring 2. O/S version: OS version of expansion drive module. 3. Node Status: It displays connection status between bases whether it is in Ring or Bus operation. 4. Base Total Count: Total number of nodes. 5. Port 1 Number: Base number connected with port Port 1 Cable: Cable type (Optic/Electric) connected with port 1. In case of Electric cable, it displays the measured length of cable for port Port 1 Date: In case of Electric cable, it displays the measured date for port Port 2 Number: Base number connected with port Port 2 Cable: Cable type (Optic/Electric) connected with port 2. In case of Electric cable, it displays the measured length of cable for port Port 2 Date: In case of Electric cable, it displays the measured date for port 1. Base changing wizard Base can be changed easily by Base Changing Wizard while PLC is operating. Base Changing Wizard has four steps: Selecting Base, Removing Base, Installing New Base, and Changing Base Finished. ATTENTION In 2MLR system, a part of expansion base can be exchanged according to configuration of expansion base. Ring topology: All expansion bases can be exchanged. Bus topology: In Bus topology, final expansion base is only changed. Perform the following steps to change base. 1 Click Online > Base Changing Wizard. 2 In Selecting Base window, select base for changing and click Next. 470 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

471 20. Dedicated ML200R Function System monitoring The field description for Selecting Base window are as follows: Field a b c d e f Description Information: Information of the Selected Base. Base module tree: It displays base module. Changeable base displays according to connection state of expansion base ( : Changeable base, : Non-changeable base). List of module on slot: It displays the information of module on selected base. Back: It is always in inactive mode while selecting base step. Next: Next step to Removing Base step. It is in active mode when you select changeable base. Cancel: Cancels Base Changing Wizard execution. ATTENTION If Base Changing Wizard execution is canceled, selected base is excluded from operation. Ensure to check Fault Mask and I/O Skip. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 471 January 2011 Honeywell

472 20. Dedicated ML200R Function System monitoring 3 Follow the information of Removing Base step and click Next. The field description for Removing Base window are as follows: Field a b c d Description Information: Information of the Removed Base. Back: Cancels Removing Base, goes to previous step. Next: Moves to Installing Base. Cancel: Cancels Base Changing Wizard. ATTENTION Error in Removing Base is occurred when base is not removed. 4 Follow the information of Installing New Base, click Next. 472 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

473 20. Dedicated ML200R Function System monitoring The field description for Installing New Base window are as follows: Field a b c d Description Information: Information of Installing New Base. Back: It is in inactive mode after base is removed. Next: Moves to Changing Base Finished. Cancel: Cancels the Base Changing Wizard. ATTENTION Error in Installing New Base is occurred when base is not installed. If base is installed normally, error is occurred when module type is different within setting module in I/O parameter and real installed base. R200 SoftMaster User's Guide 473 January 2011 Honeywell

474 20. Dedicated ML200R Function System monitoring 5 Click Finished, when Changing Base is completed. The field description for Changing Base Finished window are as follows: 474 SoftMaster User's Guide R200 Honeywell January 2011

Chapter 2 Using XG5000 Software. 2.1 Screen Configuration. XG5000 screen is composed as shown below. [Screen of XG5000]

Chapter 2 Using XG5000 Software. 2.1 Screen Configuration. XG5000 screen is composed as shown below. [Screen of XG5000] 2.1 Screen Configuration XG5000 screen is composed as shown below. [Screen of XG5000] a b f c d e [Description of screen component] a. Menu bar: It is the basic menu bar for the XG5000 software. b. Tool

More information

High Speed Counter Module

High Speed Counter Module Honeywell Process Solutions 2MLF-HO2A, 2MLF-HD2A High Speed Counter Module User's Guide 2MLF-HO2A, 2MLF-HD2A R200 May 2010 Release 200 Honeywell Notices and Trademarks Copyright 2010 by Honeywell International

More information

Honeywell Process Solutions. Analog Input Module 2MLF-AV8A, AC8A. User's Guide. ML200-AI R200 June Release 200. Honeywell

Honeywell Process Solutions. Analog Input Module 2MLF-AV8A, AC8A. User's Guide. ML200-AI R200 June Release 200. Honeywell Process Solutions Analog Input Module 2MLF-AV8A, AC8A User's Guide ML200-AI R200 Release 200 Notices and Trademarks Copyright 2010 by International Sárl. Release 200 June, 2010 While this information is

More information

Operational Insight. Software Update 1 R Software Change Notice. Revision Date: January 6, 2014 Document ID: OI-SCN-360.2

Operational Insight. Software Update 1 R Software Change Notice. Revision Date: January 6, 2014 Document ID: OI-SCN-360.2 Operational Insight Software Update 1 R360.2 Software Change Notice Revision Date: January 6, 2014 Document ID: OI-SCN-360.2 Notices and Trademarks Honeywell International Inc. 2013. All Rights Reserved.

More information

Honeywell Process Solutions. OneWireless. Release Notes. OWDOC-X252-en-220C R220.3 November Release Honeywell

Honeywell Process Solutions. OneWireless. Release Notes. OWDOC-X252-en-220C R220.3 November Release Honeywell Honeywell Process Solutions OneWireless Release Notes OWDOC-X252-en-220C R220.3 November 2014 Release 220.3 Honeywell Notices and Trademarks Copyright 2014 by Honeywell International Inc. Release 220.3

More information

Honeywell Process Solutions. OneWireless. Release Notes. OWDOC-X252-en-210B R210.2 November Release Honeywell

Honeywell Process Solutions. OneWireless. Release Notes. OWDOC-X252-en-210B R210.2 November Release Honeywell Honeywell Process Solutions OneWireless Release Notes OWDOC-X252-en-210B R210.2 November 2014 Release 210.2 Honeywell Notices and Trademarks Copyright 2013 by Honeywell International Inc. Release 210.2

More information

Aurora Multi-image System Control Software. User Manual

Aurora Multi-image System Control Software. User Manual Aurora Multi-image System Control Software User Manual Product Information Model: Aurora Controller Software Version: V010200 Release Date: January 18th, 2017 Company OSEE TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD. Contact

More information

1.1. Characteristics of GMWIN How to Connect GMWIN to PLC Method of Connection Depth of Connection...

1.1. Characteristics of GMWIN How to Connect GMWIN to PLC Method of Connection Depth of Connection... Chapter 1. Introduction 1.1. Characteristics of GMWIN...1-10 1.2. How to Connect GMWIN to PLC...1-40 1.2.1. Method of Connection...1-40 1.2.2. Depth of Connection...1-90 Chapter 2. Installation 2.1. System

More information

DriveWizard Plus Instruction Manual

DriveWizard Plus Instruction Manual DriveWizard Plus Instruction Manual To properly use the product, read this manual thoroughly. MANUAL NO. TOEP C730600 20C Table of Contents Safety Symbols and Markings...4 Manual Overview...5 Related Manuals...5

More information

Machine Controller MP900/MP2000 Series New Ladder Editor USER'S MANUAL

Machine Controller MP900/MP2000 Series New Ladder Editor USER'S MANUAL YASKAWA Machine Controller MP900/MP2000 Series New Ladder Editor USER'S MANUAL YASKAWA MANUAL NO. SIEZ-C887-13.2B Copyright 2001 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION All rights reserved. No part of this publication

More information

Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide

Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide Safety Manager Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide EP-SM.MAN.6282 Issue 4 28 September 2007 Release 120 Document Release Issue Date EP-SM.MAN.6282 120 4 September 2007 Notice This document contains Honeywell

More information

Layout and display. STILOG IST, all rights reserved

Layout and display. STILOG IST, all rights reserved 2 Table of Contents I. Main Window... 1 1. DEFINITION... 1 2. LIST OF WINDOW ELEMENTS... 1 Quick Access Bar... 1 Menu Bar... 1 Windows... 2 Status bar... 2 Pop-up menu... 4 II. Menu Bar... 5 1. DEFINITION...

More information

SIMATIC Automation License Manager Manual 02/2008 A5E

SIMATIC Automation License Manager Manual 02/2008 A5E s Contents SIMATIC Automation License Manager Product Overview 1 Installation 2 Working with the Automation License Manager 3 Glossar Index Manual 02/2008 A5E02128430-01 Safety Guidelines This manual contains

More information

Engineering Tool for PC SDWP001 Operating Manual

Engineering Tool for PC SDWP001 Operating Manual Inverter HF-520/HF-X20 Series SF-520 Series Engineering Tool for PC SDWP001 Operating Manual 1 Manual No. DM2308E-1 Table of Contents Safety Symbols and Markings...4 Safety Notes and Instructions...4 Manual

More information

Data setting software MEXE02

Data setting software MEXE02 HM-40143 Data setting software MEXE02 OPERATING MANUAL Before Use Thank you for purchasing an Oriental Motor product. This operating manual describes product handling procedures and safety precautions.

More information

GXLink MultiChannel Wave Inserter Model SP-631

GXLink MultiChannel Wave Inserter Model SP-631 800173-0A Digital High Speed GXLink MultiChannel Wave Inserter Model SP-631 User Manual Copyright 2009 It is prohibited to copy, reproduce or distribute this information in whole or in part without the

More information

DriveWare. User s Guide DriveBrowser

DriveWare. User s Guide DriveBrowser DriveWare User s Guide DriveBrowser DriveBrowser User s Guide Code: 3AUA0000024806 EN EFFECTIVE: 31.12.2008 SUPERCEDES 31.01.2008 2008 ABB Oy. All rights reserved. 5 Table of contents Table of contents...

More information

Chapter 3. Getting Started

Chapter 3. Getting Started Chapter 3. Getting Started Chapter 3. Getting Started GMWIN is a programming tool that compiles a program, makes an execution file, transfers a file to PLC, monitors and debugs PLC data. GMWIN uses the

More information

Beyond 20/20. Browser - English. Version 7.0, SP3

Beyond 20/20. Browser - English. Version 7.0, SP3 Beyond 20/20 Browser - English Version 7.0, SP3 Notice of Copyright Beyond 20/20 Desktop Browser Version 7.0, SP3 Copyright 1992-2006 Beyond 20/20 Inc. All rights reserved. This document forms part of

More information

Coding Faster: Getting More Productive with Microsoft Visual

Coding Faster: Getting More Productive with Microsoft Visual Microsoft Coding Faster: Getting More Productive with Microsoft Visual Studio Covers Microsoft Visual Studio 2005, 2008, and 2010 Zain Naboulsi Sara Ford Table of Contents Foreword Introduction xxiii xxvii

More information

Using Open Workbench Version 1.1

Using Open Workbench Version 1.1 Version 1.1 Second Edition Title and Publication Number Title: Edition: Second Edition Printed: May 4, 2005 Copyright Copyright 1998-2005 Niku Corporation and third parties. All rights reserved. Trademarks

More information

CW Configurator Operating Manual -SW1DND-RCCPU-E

CW Configurator Operating Manual -SW1DND-RCCPU-E CW Configurator Operating Manual -SW1DND-RCCPU-E SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Read these precautions before using this product.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully,

More information

Administration and Startup Guide

Administration and Startup Guide Experion PKS Administration and Startup Guide EP-DSX123 210 10/04 Release 210 Document Release Issue Date EP-DSX123 210 0 October 2004 Notice This document contains Honeywell proprietary information. Information

More information

Oracle Cloud. Using Oracle Social Network Release E

Oracle Cloud. Using Oracle Social Network Release E Oracle Cloud Using Oracle Social Network Release 11.1.11.0 E61996-01 November 2015 Oracle Cloud Using Oracle Social Network, Release 11.1.11.0 E61996-01 Copyright 2012, 2015 Oracle and/or its affiliates.

More information

Preface 1. Device Management System 2. Contact Information 3. User Manual Device Management System. English. Release

Preface 1. Device Management System 2. Contact Information 3. User Manual Device Management System. English. Release X-Tools - User Manual - 04 - Device Management System Preface 1 Device Management System 2 Contact Information 3 X-Tools User Manual - 04 - Device Management System Release 2015-11 Release 2015-11 1 /

More information

Preface 1. Device Management System 2. Contact Information 3. User Manual Device Management System. English. Release

Preface 1. Device Management System 2. Contact Information 3. User Manual Device Management System. English. Release X-Tools - User Manual - 04 - Device Management System Preface 1 Device Management System 2 Contact Information 3 X-Tools User Manual - 04 - Device Management System Release 2016-10 Release 2016-10 1 /

More information

Cat. No. Z910-E1-02. DeviceNet Safety WS02-CFSC1-E. NE1A Logic Simulator OPERATION MANUAL

Cat. No. Z910-E1-02. DeviceNet Safety WS02-CFSC1-E. NE1A Logic Simulator OPERATION MANUAL Cat. No. Z910-E1-02 DeviceNet Safety WS02-CFSC1-E NE1A Logic Simulator OPERATION MANUAL DeviceNet Safety WS02-CFSC1-E NE1A Logic Simulator Operation Manual Revised June 2007 iv Notice: OMRON products are

More information

MagicInfo VideoWall Author

MagicInfo VideoWall Author MagicInfo VideoWall Author MagicInfo VideoWall Author User Guide MagicInfo VideoWall Author is a program designed to construct a VideoWall layout and create VideoWall content by adding various elements

More information

Thank you very much for purchasing TOYO FA Digital Controller GPCsx.

Thank you very much for purchasing TOYO FA Digital Controller GPCsx. Introduction Thank you very much for purchasing TOYO FA Digital Controller GPCsx. This Programming Manual Operation is to explain menus, icons etc. of TDsxEditor as well as its operation. Read this Programming

More information

WINDOWS NT BASICS

WINDOWS NT BASICS WINDOWS NT BASICS 9.30.99 Windows NT Basics ABOUT UNIVERSITY TECHNOLOGY TRAINING CENTER The University Technology Training Center (UTTC) provides computer training services with a focus on helping University

More information

X-618 Public Address and Voice

X-618 Public Address and Voice X-618 Public Address and Voice Alarm System Commissioning Manual M_XXXXXX_CN_0 Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form without

More information

FRENIC Loader 3.3. Instruction Manual. Inverter Support Software. (FRENIC-Mini /Eco/Multi/Ace/MEGA/HF)

FRENIC Loader 3.3. Instruction Manual. Inverter Support Software. (FRENIC-Mini /Eco/Multi/Ace/MEGA/HF) Inverter Support Software FRENIC Loader 3.3 (FRENIC-Mini /Eco/Multi/Ace/MEGA/HF) Instruction Manual INR-SI47-1549d-E Copyright 2008-2014 Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. No part of this publication may be reproduced

More information

KMnet Viewer. User Guide

KMnet Viewer. User Guide KMnet Viewer User Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change for improvement without notice. We cannot be

More information

Siemens Distributor SIMATIC. WinAC MP for MP370 V3.1. Preface, Contents. Product Overview. Transferring WinAC MP to the Multi Panel

Siemens Distributor SIMATIC. WinAC MP for MP370 V3.1. Preface, Contents. Product Overview. Transferring WinAC MP to the Multi Panel Preface, Contents SIMATIC WinAC MP for MP370 V3.1 User Manual Product Overview Transferring WinAC MP to the Multi Panel Developing and Downloading a STEP 7 Project for WinAC MP Controlling Your Process

More information

NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide

NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change for improvement without notice. We

More information

Security Explorer 9.1. User Guide

Security Explorer 9.1. User Guide Security Explorer 9.1 User Guide Security Explorer 9.1 User Guide Explorer 8 Installation Guide ii 2013 by Quest Software All rights reserved. This guide contains proprietary information protected by copyright.

More information

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions Operating Instructions Software (Network Configuration and ) For Digital Imaging Systems Opening Configuration/ System Requirements General Description Before using this software, please carefully read

More information

SIMATIC. Working with STEP 7. Introduction to STEP 1. The SIMATIC Manager 2. Programming with Symbols. Creating a Program in 4

SIMATIC. Working with STEP 7. Introduction to STEP 1. The SIMATIC Manager 2. Programming with Symbols. Creating a Program in 4 Introduction to STEP 1 The SIMATIC Manager 2 SIMATIC Programming with Symbols 3 Creating a Program in 4 Working with STEP 7 Creating a Program with Function Blocks and Data Blocks 5 Getting Started Configuring

More information

General Information 1. Connection 2. User Interface 3 ATC5300. Menus 4. Automatic Transfer Controller. Remote Control Software Manual A5E

General Information 1. Connection 2. User Interface 3 ATC5300. Menus 4. Automatic Transfer Controller. Remote Control Software Manual A5E s General Information 1 Connection 2 Automatic Transfer Controller User Interface 3 Menus 4 Remote Control Software Manual Edition 01/2010 A5E02469028-01 Legal information Warning notice system This manual

More information

Table of Contents. Preface... iii COMPUTER BASICS WINDOWS XP

Table of Contents. Preface... iii COMPUTER BASICS WINDOWS XP Table of Contents Preface... iii COMPUTER BASICS Fundamentals of Computer 1 Various Types of Computers 2 Personal Computer 2 Personal Digital Assistant 3 Laptop Computer 3 Tablet PC 3 Main Frame Computer

More information

HikCentral Control Client. User Manual

HikCentral Control Client. User Manual HikCentral Control Client User Manual Legal Information User Manual 2018 Hangzhou Hikvision Digital Technology Co., Ltd. About this Manual This Manual is subject to domestic and international copyright

More information

GeniusPlus Help On Line

GeniusPlus Help On Line GeniusPlus Help On Line Starting the application File Menu Device Menu Edit Menu View Menu Tools Menu Window Menu Help Menu Parameters Explorer Version 1.12 and later - September 30, 2013 1 Guide to Rapid

More information

SC100/SC200 Series Multi-Function PID Controller. Users Manual

SC100/SC200 Series Multi-Function PID Controller. Users Manual SC100/SC200 Series Multi-Function PID Controller LOOP CONFIGURATION BUILDER SOFTWARE Model: SFEW3E Users Manual 5-2-55, Minamitsumori, Nishinari-ku, Osaka 557-0063 JAPAN Tel: +81-6-6659-8201 Fax: +81-6-6659-8510

More information

HC900 Controller Redundancy Overview & System Operation

HC900 Controller Redundancy Overview & System Operation HC900 Controller Redundancy Overview & System Operation Doc. No.: 51-52-25-133 Revision: 4 Date: Honeywell Process Solutions Notices and Trademarks Copyright 2006 by Honeywell Revision 4 Warranty/Remedy

More information

SequencePro Data Analysis Application. User Guide

SequencePro Data Analysis Application. User Guide SequencePro Data Analysis Application User Guide SequencePro Data Analysis Application User Guide DRAFT October 31, 2001 12:52 pm, Title_page.fm Copyright 2001, Applied Biosystems. All rights reserved.

More information

Magnetek Material Handling IMPULSE LINK 4.1 Basic Instruction Manual

Magnetek Material Handling IMPULSE LINK 4.1 Basic Instruction Manual Magnetek Material Handling IMPULSE LINK 4.1 Basic Instruction Manual March 2013 Part Number: 140-10350 R6 Copyright 2013 Magnetek Material Handling 2013 MAGNETEK MATERIAL HANDLING All rights reserved.

More information

TPEditor User Manual

TPEditor User Manual Table of Contents TPEditor User Manual Chapter 1 TPEditor Operation... 1-1 1-1 Recommended System Requirements... 1-1 1-2 TPEditor Software Installation... 1-1 1-3 Basic Introduction... 1-6 1-4 Skills

More information

Experion LX Safety Manager Integration Guide

Experion LX Safety Manager Integration Guide Experion LX Safety Manager Integration Guide EXDOC-X119-en-110A February 2014 Release 110 Document Release Issue Date EXDOC-X119-en-1 0A 0 February 2014 Disclaimer This document contains Honeywell proprietary

More information

Distributors News. December, 2004 Unitronics has announced a major market release. The release includes:

Distributors News. December, 2004 Unitronics has announced a major market release. The release includes: MAJOR RELEASE VISILOGIC 4.00, VISION 290, REMOTE ACCESS 4.00 & DATAXPORT 2.00 Unitronics has announced a major market release. The release includes: PID: includes internal Auto-tune Trends: Real-Time HMI

More information

Siemens Distributor SIMATIC. Component based Automation Creating PROFInet Components

Siemens Distributor SIMATIC. Component based Automation Creating PROFInet Components s SIMATIC Component based Automation Creating PROFInet Components Manual Preface, Contents Creating PROFInet components with STEP 7 1 SIMATIC Devices as PROFInet components 2 Singleton components 3 Appendix

More information

Océ Engineering Exec. Electronic Job Ticket

Océ Engineering Exec. Electronic Job Ticket Océ Engineering Exec Electronic Job Ticket Océ-Technologies B.V. Copyright 2004, Océ-Technologies B.V. Venlo, The Netherlands All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced, copied, adapted,

More information

MULTIPROG QUICK START GUIDE

MULTIPROG QUICK START GUIDE MULTIPROG QUICK START GUIDE Manual issue date: April 2002 Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Copyright 2002 by KW-Software GmbH All rights reserved. KW-Software GmbH Lagesche Straße 32 32657

More information

Stellar WAB to PST Converter 1.0

Stellar WAB to PST Converter 1.0 Stellar WAB to PST Converter 1.0 1 Overview Stellar WAB to PST Converter software converts Outlook Express Address Book, also known as Windows Address Book (WAB) files to Microsoft Outlook (PST) files.

More information

U90 Ladder Software Manual. Version 3.50, 6/03

U90 Ladder Software Manual. Version 3.50, 6/03 U90 Ladder Software Manual Version 3.50, 6/03 Table Of Contents Welcome to U90 Ladder... 1 Program Editors... 1 Project Navigation Tree...1 Browse Sequences...1 Printing Documentation...2 Interface Language...

More information

FRENIC Visual Customizer

FRENIC Visual Customizer Instruction Manual Inverter Support Software FRENIC Visual Customizer for FRENIC-Ace series Thank you for purchasing our high-performance, multipurpose FRENIC-Ace Series inverter. This manual provides

More information

Digital Display Wall Application Management Software

Digital Display Wall Application Management Software VWAS6.0 日常使用手册 Digital Display Wall Application Management Software VWAS6.0/VCMS/VEMS User Manual Copyright Statement This manual is the copyright property of VTRON. Without prior written approval from

More information

Experion PKS Control Hardware and I/O Modules Firmware Upgrade Guide

Experion PKS Control Hardware and I/O Modules Firmware Upgrade Guide Experion PKS Control Hardware and I/O Modules Firmware Upgrade Guide EPDOC-X150-en-500C May 2018 Release 500 Document Release Issue Date EPDOC-X150-en-500C 500 0 May 2018 Disclaimer This document contains

More information

KYOCERA Net Viewer 5.3 User Guide

KYOCERA Net Viewer 5.3 User Guide KYOCERA Net Viewer. User Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change without notice. We cannot be held liable

More information

AxTime Attendance Control System Software Manual

AxTime Attendance Control System Software Manual AxTime Attendance Control System Software Manual Copyright 2013 by Rosslare. All rights reserved. This manual and the information contained herein are proprietary to ROSSLARE ENTERPRISES LIMITED and/or

More information

Basic principles 1. Configuring function diagrams based on IEC 2. Administration 3 COMOS. Automation Logical. Operating Manual 04/2015 A5E AD

Basic principles 1. Configuring function diagrams based on IEC 2. Administration 3 COMOS. Automation Logical. Operating Manual 04/2015 A5E AD Basic principles 1 Configuring function diagrams based on IEC 2 COMOS Administration 3 Automation Operating Manual 04/2015 A5E32082870-AD Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices

More information

S7-PLCSIM V5.3 incl. SP1

S7-PLCSIM V5.3 incl. SP1 SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM V5.3 incl. SP1 User Manual Edition: 01/2005 Copyright and Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect

More information

SIMATIC. Process Control System PCS 7 First Steps (V7.1) Preface 1. Creating the PCS 7 Project 2. Configuring the hardware and networks

SIMATIC. Process Control System PCS 7 First Steps (V7.1) Preface 1. Creating the PCS 7 Project 2. Configuring the hardware and networks SIMATIC Process Control System PCS SIMATIC Process Control System PCS 7 Getting Started Preface 1 Creating the PCS 7 Project 2 Configuring the hardware and networks 3 Configuring the process tags and the

More information

ME scopeves 5.0. Reference Manual. Volume IIA Basic Operations. (August 2008)

ME scopeves 5.0. Reference Manual. Volume IIA Basic Operations. (August 2008) ME scopeves 5.0 Reference Manual Volume IIA Basic Operations (August 2008) i ME'scope Reference Volume IIA - Basic Operations ii Table Of Contents Notice Information in this document is subject to change

More information

Legal Notes. Regarding Trademarks KYOCERA MITA Corporation

Legal Notes. Regarding Trademarks KYOCERA MITA Corporation Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change without notice. We cannot be held liable for any problems arising from

More information

RemoteHelp User Guide

RemoteHelp User Guide Rsupport Inc. RemoteHelp User Guide RemoteHelp User Guide version 1.0 INDEX Glossary... 5 2 RemoteHelp Introduction... 7 What is RemoteHelp?... 7 Recommended specifications for the Representative and Customer...

More information

NEW CEIBO DEBUGGER. Menus and Commands

NEW CEIBO DEBUGGER. Menus and Commands NEW CEIBO DEBUGGER Menus and Commands Ceibo Debugger Menus and Commands D.1. Introduction CEIBO DEBUGGER is the latest software available from Ceibo and can be used with most of Ceibo emulators. You will

More information

Microsoft Excel is a spreadsheet tool capable of performing calculations, analyzing data and integrating information from different programs.

Microsoft Excel is a spreadsheet tool capable of performing calculations, analyzing data and integrating information from different programs. About the Tutorial Microsoft Excel is a commercial spreadsheet application, written and distributed by Microsoft for Microsoft Windows and Mac OS X. At the time of writing this tutorial the Microsoft excel

More information

User Manual Australia

User Manual Australia User Manual Australia April 2009 EAZ0057B06A Rev. A Trademarks Acknowledgements Snap-on, ShopStream Connect, ETHOS, MODIS, SOLUS, SOLUS PRO, and Vantage PRO are trademarks of Snap-on Incorporated. All

More information

Copley Indexer 2 Program User Guide

Copley Indexer 2 Program User Guide Copley Indexer 2 Program User Guide P/N 95-00744-000 Revision 2 June 2008 Copley Indexer 2 Program User Guide TABLE OF CONTENTS About This Manual... 6 1: Introduction... 9 1.1: Copley Controls Indexer

More information

Panaboard Overlayer User's Guide. Image Capture Software for Electronic Whiteboard (Panaboard)

Panaboard Overlayer User's Guide. Image Capture Software for Electronic Whiteboard (Panaboard) Panaboard Overlayer User's Guide Image Capture Software for Electronic Whiteboard (Panaboard) Contents Introduction... 3 Functional Overview... 3 Operation Flow... 3 Abbreviations... 4 Trademarks... 4

More information

PilotEdit User Manual. Author: Date: Version:

PilotEdit User Manual. Author: Date: Version: PilotEdit User Manual Author: support@pilotedit.com Date: 2018-02-28 Version: 11.3.0 URL: http://www.pilotedit.com Table of Contents 1. Introduction... 6 1.1. What is PilotEdit?... 6 1.2. PilotEdit GUI...

More information

IMS Client Operation Guide Version V1.1 Date

IMS Client Operation Guide Version V1.1 Date Version V1.1 Date 2015-10-20 About This Document About This Document About This User Manual Please note the following points before using this user manual: This user manual is intended for persons who

More information

Preface 1. Main Management System 2. Contact Information 3 SIPLUS CMS. SIPLUS CMS4000 X-Tools - User Manual Main Management System.

Preface 1. Main Management System 2. Contact Information 3 SIPLUS CMS. SIPLUS CMS4000 X-Tools - User Manual Main Management System. 4000 X-Tools - User Manual - 03 - Main Management System Preface 1 Main Management System 2 Contact Information 3 4000 X-Tools User Manual - 03 - Main Management System Release 2011-09 Release 2011-09

More information

OpenForms360 Validation User Guide Notable Solutions Inc.

OpenForms360 Validation User Guide Notable Solutions Inc. OpenForms360 Validation User Guide 2011 Notable Solutions Inc. 1 T A B L E O F C O N T EN T S Introduction...5 What is OpenForms360 Validation?... 5 Using OpenForms360 Validation... 5 Features at a glance...

More information

DS800 Development Suite Quick Start Guide for the FloBoss 107

DS800 Development Suite Quick Start Guide for the FloBoss 107 Form A6267 Part Number D301597X012 January 2009 DS800 Development Suite Quick Start Guide for the FloBoss 107 Version 1.0 Remote Automation Solutions Revision Tracking Sheet January 2009 This manual may

More information

SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM V5.0. User Manual. Edition 06/

SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM V5.0. User Manual. Edition 06/ SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM V5.0 User Manual Edition 06/2001 2809918-0002 Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product

More information

User s Manual. Mask Pattern Editor IM B9852UH-01E. 4th Edition

User s Manual. Mask Pattern Editor IM B9852UH-01E. 4th Edition User s Manual Mask Pattern Editor 4th Edition This user's manual contains useful information about the functions and operating procedures and lists the handling precautions of the Mask Pattern Editor (for

More information

FX Tools Software Package - FX CommPro N2 User s Guide

FX Tools Software Package - FX CommPro N2 User s Guide User s Guide FX CommPro N2 Issue Date September 25, 2008 FX Tools Software Package - FX CommPro N2 User s Guide FX Tools Software Package FX CommPro N2... 3 Introduction...3 Installation... 4 Installing

More information

ADMS-7. Operation manual YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD.

ADMS-7. Operation manual YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. ADMS-7 Operation manual YAESU MUSEN CO., LTD. TABLE OF CONTENTS Introduction...2 System Requirements...2 Operating system (OS)...2 CPU...2 RAM (system memory)...2 HDD (Hard Disk)...2 Necessary PC peripheral

More information

Organizer User s Guide

Organizer User s Guide P2WW-2301-02ENZ0 Organizer User s Guide CONTENTS 1. Introduction... 1 Users who may use Windows Vista... 3 1.1. System Requirements... 4 2. Basic Operations... 5 2.1. Starting ScanSnap Organizer... 5 2.2.

More information

DATA VIEWER FOR PAPERLESS RECORDER

DATA VIEWER FOR PAPERLESS RECORDER Instruction Manual DATA VIEWER FOR PAPERLESS RECORDER TYPE: PHR/PHW INP-TN513550i-E WARNING If an error or improper operation occurs in our product, or customer-made programs should be found defective,

More information

User Guide 701P Wide Format Solution Wide Format Scan Service

User Guide 701P Wide Format Solution Wide Format Scan Service User Guide 701P44865 6204 Wide Format Solution Wide Format Scan Service Xerox Corporation Global Knowledge & Language Services 800 Phillips Road Bldg. 845-17S Webster, NY 14580 Copyright 2006 Xerox Corporation.

More information

GE Fanuc Automation. Programmable Control Products. VersaPro Programming Software. User's Guide. GFK-1670A January 2000 FANUC

GE Fanuc Automation. Programmable Control Products. VersaPro Programming Software. User's Guide. GFK-1670A January 2000 FANUC GE Fanuc Automation Programmable Control Products VersaPro Programming Software User's Guide GFK-1670A January 2000 Warnings, Cautions, and Notes as Used in this Publication GFL-002 Warning Warning notices

More information

Motion Architect User Guide Compumotor Division Parker Hannifin Corporation p/n

Motion Architect User Guide Compumotor Division Parker Hannifin Corporation p/n Compumotor Motion Architect User Guide Compumotor Division Parker Hannifin Corporation p/n 88-013056-01 Motion Architect The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not

More information

Software User's Guide

Software User's Guide Software User's Guide The contents of this guide and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice. Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications

More information

W-E

W-E Signage Suite V2.20 User Guide 605220-02-01-W-E-051613-02 Trademarks Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, and Microsoft are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks are the

More information

EZPLC Software Manual Manual Part Number EZPLC-EDIT-M Revision A.6. Introduction

EZPLC Software Manual Manual Part Number EZPLC-EDIT-M Revision A.6. Introduction EZPLC Software Manual Manual Part Number EZPLC-EDIT-M Revision A.6 Introduction This page intentionally left blank. EZPLC Software Manual Manual Part Number EZPLC-EDIT-M Revision A.6 Introduction WARNING!

More information

DISCLAIMER Whilst every effort has been made

DISCLAIMER Whilst every effort has been made PUBLISHED BY Gallagher Group Limited Kahikatea Drive, Private Bag 3026 Hamilton, New Zealand www.gallagherams.com Copyright Gallagher Group Limited 2011. All rights reserved. Patents Pending. MyScale Pro

More information

VisualPST 2.4. Visual object report editor for PowerSchool. Copyright Park Bench Software, LLC All Rights Reserved

VisualPST 2.4. Visual object report editor for PowerSchool. Copyright Park Bench Software, LLC All Rights Reserved VisualPST 2.4 Visual object report editor for PowerSchool Copyright 2004-2015 Park Bench Software, LLC All Rights Reserved www.parkbenchsoftware.com This software is not free - if you use it, you must

More information

USER MANUAL. Document Version: 3.0

USER MANUAL. Document Version: 3.0 USER MANUAL Document Version: 3.0 Released on 18th December 2013 Disclaimer While PDS Infotech (P) Ltd. makes every effort to deliver high quality products, we do not guarantee that our products are free

More information

NiceForm User Guide. English Edition. Rev Euro Plus d.o.o. & Niceware International LLC All rights reserved.

NiceForm User Guide. English Edition. Rev Euro Plus d.o.o. & Niceware International LLC All rights reserved. www.nicelabel.com, info@nicelabel.com English Edition Rev-0910 2009 Euro Plus d.o.o. & Niceware International LLC All rights reserved. www.nicelabel.com Head Office Euro Plus d.o.o. Ulica Lojzeta Hrovata

More information

Fleet Manager II. Operator Manual

Fleet Manager II. Operator Manual Fleet Manager II Operator Manual Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 About this Publication 2 About Fleet Manager II 3 Contact BW Technologies by Honeywell 4 Getting Started 5 Start

More information

Libraries. Multi-Touch. Aero Peek. Sema Foundation 10 Classes 2 nd Exam Review ICT Department 5/22/ Lesson - 15

Libraries. Multi-Touch. Aero Peek. Sema Foundation 10 Classes 2 nd Exam Review ICT Department 5/22/ Lesson - 15 10 Classes 2 nd Exam Review Lesson - 15 Introduction Windows 7, previous version of the latest version (Windows 8.1) of Microsoft Windows, was produced for use on personal computers, including home and

More information

For ClassPad 300. ClassPad Manager. (ProgramLink) Limited Version. User s Guide. RJA

For ClassPad 300. ClassPad Manager. (ProgramLink) Limited Version. User s Guide.  RJA For ClassPad 300 E ClassPad Manager (ProgramLink) Limited Version User s Guide RJA510188-4 http://world.casio.com/edu_e/ Note Display examples shown in this User s Guide are intended for illustrative purposes

More information

SEWCAT USER MANUAL V APRIL 14, 2017 S & S COMPUTING Oak Ridge, TN 37830

SEWCAT USER MANUAL V APRIL 14, 2017 S & S COMPUTING Oak Ridge, TN 37830 SEWCAT USER MANUAL V4.0.6 APRIL 14, 2017 S & S COMPUTING Oak Ridge, TN 37830 Contents 1. Introduction... 3 1.1 Getting Started... 3 1.2 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)... 5 1.3 Contact Us... 5 1.4 Purchase

More information

Windows 8.1 User Guide for ANU Staff

Windows 8.1 User Guide for ANU Staff Windows 8.1 User Guide for ANU Staff This guide has been created to assist with basic tasks and navigating Windows 8.1. Further tips for using Windows 8.1 can be found on the IT Services website, or by

More information

Table of Contents. Word. Using the mouse wheel 39 Moving the insertion point using the keyboard 40 Resume reading 41

Table of Contents. Word. Using the mouse wheel 39 Moving the insertion point using the keyboard 40 Resume reading 41 Table of Contents iii Table of Contents Word Starting Word What is word processing? 2 Starting Word 2 Exploring the Start screen 4 Creating a blank document 4 Exploring the Word document window 5 Exploring

More information

IBM NetBAY Virtual Console Software. Installer and User Guide

IBM NetBAY Virtual Console Software. Installer and User Guide IBM NetBAY Virtual Console Software Installer and User Guide INSTRUCTIONS This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

More information

DRAFT. Table of Contents About this manual... ix About CuteSITE Builder... ix. Getting Started... 1

DRAFT. Table of Contents About this manual... ix About CuteSITE Builder... ix. Getting Started... 1 DRAFT Table of Contents About this manual... ix About CuteSITE Builder... ix Getting Started... 1 Setting up... 1 System Requirements... 1 To install CuteSITE Builder... 1 To register CuteSITE Builder...

More information

SOFTWARE MANUAL PHOENIX AC DRIVE DX & EX DRIVEMASTER

SOFTWARE MANUAL PHOENIX AC DRIVE DX & EX DRIVEMASTER SOFTWARE MANUAL PHOENIX AC DRIVE DX & EX DRIVEMASTER TABLE OF CONTENTS i SECTION TITLE PAGE 1.0 Introduction 1-1 2.0 Initial Setup 2-1 3.0 Main Menu 3-1 4.0 Configuring the Communications 4-1 5.0 Upload/Download

More information